Telecine STE-B1

Home , Color grading, Telecine, Test film, Video denoising

Telecine STE-B1

Operating Instructions Published by

BTS Media Solutions GmbH

Brunnenweg 9 D-64331 Weiterstadt, Germany P.O. Box 1165

Tel: +49 (0) 6155-870-0 Fax: +49 (0) 6155-870-300

Web Sites Internet: www.thomsonbroadcast.com www.imagingsystems.de

Intranet: www.weiterstadt.thmulti.com

Trademarks

All product names mentioned in this manual are the trademarks of their respective owners.

Copyrights

Information in this document is subject to change without notice. This document and any updates and/or supplemental information, including any copies thereof, cannot be reproduced, neither communicated to a third party, without written authorization from THOMSON multimedia Broadcast Solutions.

Please notify THOMSON multimedia Broadcast Solutions of any errors in this document. We also would appreciate any comments you have to improve this manual.

CONTENTS

1. General 1.1 About the Manual...... 1-1 1.2 Software State...... 1-1

2. Control and Display Elements 2.1 Filmdeck...... 2-1 2.2 Control Panels...... 2-5 2.2.1 Local Control Panel FH 4500...... 2-5 2.2.2 Graphical Control Panel GCP...... 2-8

3. Operational Preparations 3.1 Hardware Conditions...... 3-1

3.2 Power-Up...... 3-1

3.3 Basic Adjustments of the Telecine...... 3-2 3.3.1 Configuration of the Control Panel...... 3-2 3.3.2 Select TV Standard...... 3-3

3.4 User-Specific Configuration of the Telecine...... 3-5 3.4.1 Change Optical Block...... 3-5 3.4.2 Change Film Gate...... 3-7 3.4.3 Using Effect Filters...... 3-8 3.4.3.1 General...... 3-8 3.4.3.2 Inserting the Effect Filter...... 3-9 3.4.3.3 Focus Adjustment...... 3-10 3.4.4 Setup Filmdeck...... 3-11 3.4.5 Setup Film...... 3-11 3.4.6 Select TV-Ratio 4:3 / 16:9...... 3-12 3.4.7 Select Speed...... 3-12

3.5 Perform FPN Correction...... 3-13

3.6 Thread the Film...... 3-15 3.6.1 Define Winding Direction...... 3-15 3.6.2.1 Mount Winding Plate...... 3-16 3.6.2.2 Mount Film Reels...... 3-17 3.6.4 Thread Film Correctly...... 3-22 3.6.4.1 Winding Plate Operation...... 3-22 3.6.4.2 Film Reel Operation...... 3-22 3.6.4.3 Switch to Standby...... 3-23

3.7 Adjust Frame Line...... 3-25

3.8 Adjust Focus...... 3-26

3.9 Adjust Sizing Format...... 3-27 3.9.1 Select Fixed Film Scanning Format...... 3-27 3.9.2 Select Fixed Reproduction Format...... 3-29 3.9.3 Adjust Sizing Format Variably...... 3-30 3.9.4 Adjust Horizontal and Vertical Blanking...... 3-31

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 I Contents STE-B1

3.10 Matching to Different Color and Monochrome Film Types...... 3-33 3.10.1 Define Film Type...... 3-33 3.10.2 Adjust Film Masking...... 3-35 3.10.3 Adjust Intensity of Film Illumination...... 3-38 3.10.4 Adjust Analog Signal Basic Gain...... 3-40 3.10.5 Adjust White Level (and Black Level)...... 3-42 3.10.6 Adjust Black Level...... 3-44 3.10.7 Adjust White Level...... 3-46 3.10.8 Adjust Gray Level (Gamma Maser and Gamma RGB)...... 3-47 3.10.9 Adjust Contour and Coring...... 3-48

3.11 Adjust Audio Channels (Option)...... 3-50 3.11.1 Select Audio Sources...... 3-50 3.11.2 Pre-Equalize Audio Sources...... 3-52 3.11.3 Adjust Dolby Noise Reduction...... 3-53 3.11.4 Select Lowpass Filter...... 3-55 3.11.5 Synchronize Digital Audio Channels...... 3-56 3.11.6 Select Preemphasis...... 3-57 3.11.7 Select Mono/Stereo Operation...... 3-58 3.11.8 Adjust Lip-synchronous Film Sound...... 3-60 3.11.9 Check Film Audio Paths With Test Tone...... 3-61 3.11.10 Adjust Studio Level...... 3-63 3.11.11 Adapt Audio Outputs to Studio Inputs...... 3-64 3.11.12 Adjust Headphone and Monitoring Volume...... 3-65 3.11.13 Adjust SEPMAG Channels...... 3-66

3.12 Using ARRI, AATON or EVERTZ Keycode Readers...... 3-68 3.12.1 Safety Instructions...... 3-68 3.12.2 General...... 3-69 3.12.3 Tools Required...... 3-69 3.12.4 Overview Mounting Set...... 3-70

3.12.5 Mounting the Keycode Readers on the Respective Mounting Plate...... 3-71 3.12.5.1 ARRI Keycode Reader...... 3-71 3.12.5.2 AATON Keycode Reader...... 3-73 3.12.5.3 EVERTZ Keycode Reader...... 3-74

3.12.6 Mounting Single Keycode Reader Version on the Filmdeck Base Plate. . 3-75 3.12.6.1 ARRI Keycode Reader...... 3-77 3.12.6.2 AATON Keycode Reader...... 3-78 3.12.6.3 EVERTZ Keycode Reader...... 3-79 3.12.6.4 Deflection Roller Adjustment (AATON Reader)...... 3-80

3.12.7 Parking Position of the Keycode Readers...... 3-81 3.12.7.1 ARRI Keycode Reader...... 3-81 3.12.7.2 AATON / EVERTZ Keycode Reader...... 3-82

3.12.8 Mounting Dual Keycode Readers Version...... 3-83 3.12.8.1 ARRI and AATON Keycode Readers...... 3-84 3.12.8.2 ARRI and EVERTZ Keycode Readers...... 3-85

3.12.9 Usage of the Parking Position in Case of Dual Reader Version...... 3-86 3.12.9.1 ARRI and EVERTZ Keycode Readers...... 3-87

3.12.10 Arresting the Swing Arm of the Damping Roller...... 3-88 3.12.11 Cabling the Keycode Readers...... 3-89

II Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 Contents

3.12.12 EMV Requirements...... 3-90

4. Menu control 4.1 Basic Menu Control with Graphical Control Panel GCP...... 4-1 4.1.1 Control and Display Elements GCP...... 4-1 4.1.2 Menustructure of GCP...... 4-2

4.2 Basic Menu Control with Functional Control Panel FCP...... 4-3 4.2.1 Main Menu Overview FCP...... 4-8

4.3 Home Menu FCP...... 4-9 4.3.1 Adjust Channel CH 1, CH 2...... 4-12 4.3.2 Set Focus...... 4-13 4.3.3 Set Frame...... 4-14 4.3.4 Select Speed...... 4-15

4.4 Film Menu FCP...... 4-17 4.4.1 Set Film Masking...... 4-19 4.4.2 Film Setup...... 4-22

4.5 Sizing Menu FCP...... 4-25 4.5.1 Repro Data...... 4-27 4.5.2 Adjust Blank...... 4-28 4.5.3 Sizing Setup...... 4-30 4.5.3.1 Sizing Setup “Zoom Mode”...... 4-30 4.5.3.2 Sizing Setup “Auto Unity”...... 4-31 4.5.3.3 Sizing Setup “ACA-Emul”...... 4-31 4.5.3.4 Sizing Setup “Cinemascope”...... 4-32 4.5.3.5 Sizing Setup “H-flip”...... 4-32 4.5.3.6 Sizing Setup “V-flip”...... 4-32 4.5.3.7 Sizing Setup “Fixed Aspect”...... 4-33 4.5.3.8 Sizing Setup “Fixed Repro”...... 4-34 4.5.3.9 Sizing Setup ”SDTV-Ratio”...... 4-35 4.5.3.10 Sizing Setup ”16mm Mode”...... 4-36 4.5.3.11 Sizing Setup “Rhombic Effects”...... 4-37 4.5.3.12 Sizing Setup ”Sizing Base”...... 4-38 4.5.4 Fixed Film Formats (Tables)...... 4-39 4.5.4.1 35 mm, 4 Perf, Full Aperture LGA and Gate...... 4-39 4.5.4.2 35mm, 4 Perf, Full Aperture LGA, ACA Gate...... 4-40 4.5.4.3 35mm, 4 Perf, Full Aperture LGA and Gate, Anamorphic...... 4-41 4.5.4.4 35mm, 4 Perf, Full Aperture LGA, ACA Gate, Anamorphic...... 4-41 4.5.4.5 35mm, 3 Perf, Full Aperture LGA and Gate...... 4-42 4.5.4.6 35mm, 3 Perf, full aperture LGA, ACA gate...... 4-42 4.5.4.7 35mm, 2 Perf, Full Aperture LGA and Gate...... 4-43 4.5.4.8 35mm, 2 Perf, Full Aperture LGA, ACA Gate...... 4-43 4.5.4.9 16mm, Super 16mm LGA and Gate...... 4-44 4.5.4.10 16mm, Super 16mm LGA, 16mm Gate...... 4-45 4.5.4.11 16mm, Super LGA and Gate, Anamorphic...... 4-46 4.5.4.12 16mm, Super 16mm LGA, 16mm Gate, Anamorphic...... 4-46

4.6 Grading Menu FCP...... 4-47 4.6.1 Grading Setup ...... 4-50 4.6.1.1 Grading Setup Menu ”CRT Gamma” (Cathode Ray Tube)...... 4-51 4.6.1.2 Grading Setup Menu ”Color”F...... 4-51 4.6.1.3 Grading Setup Menu ”Contour Gain Bal.”...... 4-51 4.6.1.4 Grading Setup Menu ”Peak Frequency H or V”...... 4-52 4.6.1.5 Grading Setup Menu “Ranges”...... 4-52

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 III Contents STE-B1

4.6.1.6 Grading Setup Menu “Black Gamma Mode” ...... 4-52 4.6.1.7 Grading Setup Menu “White Gamma Mode” ...... 4-53 4.6.1.8 Grading Setup Menu “6 SC Limiter” ...... 4-53 4.6.1.9 Grading Setup Menu “6 SC Illegal Color” (Mark)...... 4-54 4.6.1.10 Extended Color Correction Ranges...... 4-55 4.6.1.11 Grading Recommendation in “Extended Range” Mode...... 4-57 4.6.1.12 Adjustment of the Unity Values in the “Extended Range” Mode...... 4-58 4.6.1.13 High Density Range in Print NEG Mode...... 4-61 4.6.1.14 Black Stretch / Compression...... 4-62 4.6.1.15 White Stretch / Compression...... 4-63 4.6.1.16 Black and White Gamma Combined...... 4-64

4.7 Time Code Menu FCP...... 4-67 4.7.1 Keycode Setup...... 4-70 4.7.2 Checking and Operating Keycode Generation...... 4-71 4.7.2.1 Manual Setup...... 4-73 4.7.2.2 Remarks Concerning the Keycode Numbering...... 4-75 4.7.2.3 Learn Mode “Head Offset” ...... 4-77 4.7.2.4 Remarks Concerning “Keycode in Data” ...... 4-78

4.8 Multi Cue Menu FCP...... 4-79

4.9 Audio Level Menu FCP...... 4-83 4.9.1 Audio Level Setup...... 4-87 4.9.2 Operating Sequences...... 4-89

4.10 Audio Config Menu FCP...... 4-93 4.10.1 Setup Input Source...... 4-96 4.10.2 Setup Noise Reduction...... 4-98 4.10.3 Setup Lowpass...... 4-100 4.10.4 Select Reference...... 4-102 4.10.5 Setup Preemphasis...... 4-103 4.10.6 Select Output Mode...... 4-104 4.10.7 Setup Channel Delay...... 4-106 4.10.8 Select Test Tone...... 4-107

4.11 Monitoring Menu FCP...... 4-109 4.11.1 Select Test Pattern...... 4-112 4.11.2 Preset WFM...... 4-114 4.11.3 Monitoring Setup...... 4-116 4.11.3.1 Monitoring Setup ”Sequence” ...... 4-116 4.11.3.2 Monitoring Setup ”H-Blanking” ...... 4-117 4.11.3.3 Monitoring Setup ”Clamp Local” ...... 4-117 4.11.3.4 Monitoring Setup ”Clamp Remote” ...... 4-117 4.11.3.5 Monitoring Setup ”RemCtrl 1–2” ...... 4-118 4.11.3.6 Monitoring Setup ”Master on” ...... 4-119

4.12 User Menu FCP...... 4-121 4.12.1 Setup Data Output...... 4-124 4.12.1.1 Data Output Setup ”Packing Mode” ...... 4-125 4.12.1.2 Data Output Setup ”Data Conversion” ...... 4-126 4.12.1.3 Function of Look-up Tables for Data Applications / Data for TV...... 4-140 4.12.1.4 Function of Look-up Tables for Data Applications / Data for Film...... 4-143 4.12.1.5 Data Output Setup ”Connection Mode” ...... 4-143 4.12.1.6 Data Output Setup ”Image File Format” ...... 4-144 4.12.1.7 Data Output Setup ”Color Sequence” ...... 4-145 4.12.1.8 Data Output Setup ”Transfer Mode” ...... 4-146

IV Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 Contents

4.13 Setup Menu FCP...... 4-147 4.13.1 Setup TV Standard...... 4-149 4.13.2 Setup Film Deck...... 4-152 4.13.2.1 Filmdeck Setting “Core Diameter Left / Right” ...... 4-152 4.13.2.2 Filmdeck Setting “Auto Stop” ...... 4-153 4.13.2.3 Filmdeck Setting “Perforation” ...... 4-154 4.13.2.4 Filmdeck Setting ”Auto Rescan” ...... 4-155 4.13.2.5 Filmdeck Setting ”Scan Standard Mode” ...... 4-156 4.13.2.6 Filmdeck Setting ”Maximum Shuttle Speed 35mm” ...... 4-157 4.13.2.7 Filmdeck Setting ”Maximum Shuttle Speed 16mm” ...... 4-157 4.13.2.8 Filmdeck Setting ”SepMag Coupling” ...... 4-158 4.13.2.9 Filmdeck Setting ”TCgen Out Coupling” ...... 4-158 4.13.2.10 Filmdeck Setting ”Editor Out Coupling” ...... 4-159 4.13.2.11 Filmdeck Setting ”Lamp Shutdown Delay” ...... 4-159

4.13.3 Setup Video...... 4-161 4.13.3.1 Setup Video ”H/V-Blanking” ...... 4-161 4.13.3.2 Setup Video ”Analog Coding Format” ...... 4-162 4.13.3.3 Setup Video ”Sync on RGB” ...... 4-163 4.13.3.4 Setup Video ”Limiter 102%” ...... 4-163 4.13.3.5 Setup Video ”VITC” ...... 4-163 4.13.3.6 Setup Video ”Key Blanking” ...... 4-164 4.13.3.7 Setup Video ”Digital Coding Format” ...... 4-164 4.13.3.8 Setup Video ”Sync on YCRCB” ...... 4-165 4.13.3.9 Setup Video ”Bi-Level Sync” ...... 4-165 4.13.3.10 Setup Video ”Actual HOA Filter” ...... 4-166 4.13.3.11 Setup Video ”Output Wordlength” ...... 4-166 4.13.3.12 Setup Video ”Matrix 1080x720p” ...... 4-166

4.13.4 Setup Genlock...... 4-167 4.13.4.1 Genlock Setting ”Genlock Ref-Sync-Select” ...... 4-168 4.13.4.2 Genlock Setting ”Genlock Pixel_Delay” ...... 4-168 4.13.4.3 Genlock Setting ”Genlock Subpixel_Delay” ...... 4-169 4.13.4.4 Genlock Setting ”Genlock Line_Delay” ...... 4-169 4.13.4.5 Genlock Setting ”Enable Rack2-Rack3 Delay” ...... 4-170 4.13.4.6 Genlock Setting ”Rack2-Rack3 Delay” ...... 4-170

4.13.5 Setup Panel...... 4-172 4.13.5.1 Control Panel Setting ”Film Supply” ...... 4-172 4.13.5.2 Control Panel Setting ”Screen Saver” ...... 4-173 4.13.5.3 Control Panel Setting ”Beep on User Message” ...... 4-173 4.13.5.4 Control Panel Setting ”Beep on Diagn Message” ...... 4-174 4.13.5.5 Control Panel Setting ”Keyclick” ...... 4-174 4.13.5.6 Control Panel Setting ”Multi Function Dial Memory” ...... 4-174 4.13.5.7 Control Panel Setting ”Press MF Dial Enabled” ...... 4-175 4.13.5.8 Control Panel Setting ”Pressing MF Dial Switches JOG <–>” ...... 4-175 4.13.5.9 Control Panel Setting ”MF Dial Clutch” ...... 4-175 4.13.5.10 Control Panel Setting ”MF Dial Rubbing” ...... 4-176 4.13.5.11 Control Panel Setting ”Volatile Softkeys Provided after (x0.1s)” ...... 4-176 4.13.5.12 Control Panel Setting ”Extended Softkey Modes (Toggle, Switch)” ...... 4-177 4.13.5.13 Control Panel Setting ”Key Toggles if Pressed Shorter than (x 0.1s)” . . . . 4-178 4.13.5.14 Control Panel Setting ”Key Auto Hold Time in Switch Mode (sec)” ...... 4-178 4.13.5.15 Control Panel Setting ”Key Holding if Pressed Longer than” ...... 4-179 4.13.5.16 Control Panel Setting ”Rotation Adjust Mode (Linear / Accelerated)” . . . . . 4-180 4.13.5.17 Control Panel Setting ”iMCS Message Weighting for Panel” ...... 4-180

4.13.6 Set Time...... 4-181

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 V Contents STE-B1

4.13.7 Set REMIF – Setup Remote Interface...... 4-182

4.14 Diagnosis Menu FCP...... 4-185 4.14.1 Keyboard Test...... 4-187 4.14.2 Display Test...... 4-188 4.14.3 Status Display...... 4-189 4.14.4 Option Control Dialog...... 4-191 4.14.5 Software Configuration of the Controllers...... 4-193 4.14.6 Hard- and Software Equipment of the P.C. Boards...... 4-194

5. Operation 5.1 Reproduction (Play)...... 5-1 5.1.1 Play...... 5-1 5.1.2 Jogging...... 5-1 5.1.3 Vario Motion...... 5-2 5.1.4 Shuttle...... 5-2

5.2 Automatic Switching-Off...... 5-3 5.2.1 Film End Switching-Off...... 5-3 5.2.2 Film Break Switching-Off...... 5-3 5.2.3 Thermal Switching-Off...... 5-4

5.3 Manual Emergency Switching-Off ...... 5-5

6. Maintenance

6.1 Basic Accessories...... 6-1

6.2 Maintenance and Aids Materials...... 6-2

6.3 Cleaning and Maintenance Intervals...... 6-3

6.4 Safety Instructions...... 6-4

6.5 Clean the Film Drive Mechanism...... 6-5 6.5.1 Clean the PT Rollers...... 6-6 6.5.2 Clean the Film Gate...... 6-7 6.5.3 Clean the Capstan Roller...... 6-9 6.5.4 Clean and Degauss the Commag Audio ead...... 6-10 6.5.5 Clean the Reel Holder, Winding Plate and Reel Locking Knob...... 6-11

6.6 Clean the Optical Path...... 6-13 6.6.1 Clean the Optical Block...... 6-15 6.6.2 Clean the Front Area of the Light Splitter...... 6-16 6.6.3 Clean the Condenser Light Slit...... 6-17 6.6.4 Clean the Filters and Lenses...... 6-18 6.6.5 Clean the Filters of the Filter Wheel...... 6-20

6.7 Clean the Comopt Sound Optics...... 6-21 6.8 Change the Comopt Sound Lamp...... 6-23

6.9 Clean the Air Filters...... 6-27 6.9.1 Front Side Filters...... 6-27 6.9.2 Rear Side Filters...... 6-28

VI Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 Contents

6.10 Adjust Compressed Air of the Gateblast Unit...... 6-29

6.11 Clean the Blowers...... 6-31 6.11.1 Exhaust Air Blowers...... 6-32 6.11.2 Fresh Air Blowers...... 6-32

6.12 Change the Backup Battery...... 6.12 6.12.1 Change the Backup Battery in the Telecine...... 6-33 6.12.2 Change the Backup Battery in the Functional Control Panel...... 6-33

7. Index

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 VII Contents STE-B1

VIII Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 1. General

1. GENERAL

1.1 ABOUT THE MANUAL

This manual is part 2 of the Shadow Telecine STE-B1 Customer’s Manual. This part informs the user about control and display elements, operational preparations, menu control, operation and maintenance.

All further information concerning installation and repair you will find in the Planning and Installation Manual and the Service Manual (in preparation) of the system.

Note! The menu control is described in the separate manual

Graphical Control Panel GCP1 Customer’s Manual - FU 0104

1.2 SOFTWARE STATE

1.2.1 STE-B1 SHADOW TELECINE

The present manual documents the following software states:

Shadow Telecine operating software version V2.47

D ASC: Analog Signal Controller Board FY 4105 (in rack 1) . . . . . V2.44 D FDC: Filmdeck Controller Board FY 4203 (in rack 2) ...... V2.47 D SPC: Spatial Processing Control Board FY 6346 (in rack 3) . . . V4.44 D FCP: Functional Control Panel ...... V4.41 D GCP: Graphical Control Panel ...... V1.7.10

1.2.2 TELECINE CONTROLLERS

D Pandora Platinum The operating software V2.47 (Shadow) was tested by Thomson with Platinum software version 3.8.2

D Da Vinci “Renaissance 8:8:8 The operating software V2.47 (Shadow) was tested by Thomson with Renais- sance software version 4.3.2

D Da Vinci “Mainframe 2k” The operating software version V2.47 (Shadow) was tested by Thomson with Mainframe 2K software version 3.1.2

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 1-1 1. General STE-B1

1-2 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 2. Control and Display Elements

2. CONTROL AND DISPLAY ELEMENTS

2.1 FILMDECK

STE -B1

3 3

4 5

Fig. 201: Shadow Telecine STE-B1

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 2-1 2. Control and Display Elements STE-B1

1 Lamps (2x) serve the lighting of the telecine interior. Can be switched off, if required.

Film deck lamp switch

2 Locking lever lever for the optical block (LGA, lens gate assembly). The optical block is locked by turning the locking lever in cw direction.

Locking lever

2-2 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 2. Control and Display Elements

3 Wind A / B two switches for selecting the winding direction of the threaded film. WIND A Winding direction in ccw direction. WIND B Winding direction in cw direction. Application: for rewinding a film threaded with inversed sides.

Winding switch

4 Control Panel Local Control Panel FH 4500 for Play, Stop, Step, Shuttle, FPN, Framing, Stand by, additional functions and remote delegation. For further details see next section.

5 Power mains switch for switching on/off the telecine.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 2-3 2. Control and Display Elements STE-B1

2-4 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 2. Control and Display Elements

2.2 CONTROL PANELS

2.2.1 LOCAL CONTROL PANEL FH 4500

FRMY Play Play Stand F1 F2 FPN I A " by Shuttle Focus S8 S16 FPN I Step Stop Step Remote FRMB A"J

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 2-5 2. Control and Display Elements STE-B1

1 F1 ... F4 Function buttons are not assigned yet. Quick selection for future use.

S8 Pre selection of S8mm film scanning for FPN correction Only active in case S8mm Option is installed!

S16 Pre selection of 16mm film scanning for FPN correction

2 FRM ↑↓ / FPN Pushbutton for coarse framing adjustment by means of the film frameline.

Setting range: Each time the key is pressed, the film will be shifted in downward or upward direction by one perforation whole per picture of the picture height.

FPN Switches on the automatical noise signal compensation: Fixed Pattern Noise and shading correction (shading signal compensation and white balance).

During compensation, the picture gate has to be open (no film threaded)!

In order to avoid operational errors, this function is only enabled when pressing the two buttons at the same time!

3 Film motion Pushbuttons for the film motion control: control

Step Single-frame selection forward/reverse. On pressing the Step button, the telecine will automatically enter the Stop mode. Still frame has broadcast quality.

After Stop the projection lamp is switched to reduced lighting power immediately (approx. 5 s after Stop the safety shutter is closed). Play Film presentation in the forward or reverse mode. Can be entered from all operating modes. The projection lamp is switched to full lighting power. Stop In the Play mode: quick stop. In the Shuttle mode: termination of the search function.

4 Shuttle Visible search mode is switched on (selected: shuttle speed = 0 and audio channel is muted). Shuttle mode can be entered from all operational modes.

The search speed is set with control 5 and remains constant.

Rotation to the left = film motion reverse Rotation to the right = film motion forward

2-6 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 2. Control and Display Elements

5 Control Function together with key Shuttle: for rapidly locating a scene in forward and reverse run.

Function together with key Focus adjust/assist: for optical film focusing.

6 Focus Pushbuttons for the focus control: The adjustment is set with control 5 .

7 Remote Pressing the button delegates the control functions from the Local Control Panel to an external Remote Control Panel and vice versa (toggle mode). The button is lit when the control functions are remotable. Automatic switch over from Remote to Local Control Panel: 1. with Stand by “On” and pressing button Stand by (e.g. in an emergency) 2. pressing button Stop.

8 Stand by Indicates that the machine is ready for operation. Pushbutton for switching on the standby mode. The winding motors are switched on (film is automatically tightened) and the capstan motor is released for operation.

Prior to settings, always carry out FPN correction first.

During operation, the Stand by button lamp has to be lit all the time.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 2-7 2. Control and Display Elements STE-B1

2.2.2 GRAPHICAL CONTROL PANEL GCP 1

Trackball delegation: Power Dialog buttons For future use to panel to machine TK button

Previous Prev

Control Ctrl Trackball

Lock

Acceleration

Help

Digits

Unity

Dialog function buttons 2. Display Digipots Machine controls

Fig. 202: Graphical Control Panel GCP1

Machine Control Section

The Machine Control Section is located in the lower right corner of the GCP. All buttons (including the trackball – if delegated) perform transport functions of the telecine. Undeclared buttons are currently not in use.

2-8 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 2. Control and Display Elements

TK 1

JOG VAR STL 5

Step Step 6

PlayStop Play

Fig. 203: Machine control section

1 1 button for the machine selection (TK)

2 Display button for trackball delegation to GUI

3 Machine button for trackball delegation to machine control

4 Trackball

5 3 buttons for Machine-Mode-Selection (Jog, Var, Shuttle)

6 5 machine-control-buttons (play, reverse play, step forward/backward, stop)

Undeclared buttons are not in use!

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 2-9 2. Control and Display Elements STE-B1

1 TK Button To control the telecine press the TK BUTTON (Button gets lit). All transport controls are now delegated to the telecine.

2 Display Button Over the trackball on the left you find the DISPLAY BUTTON. Pressing this button delegates the trackball to the GUI (graphical user interface).

3 Machine Deck Over the trackball on the right you find the MACHINE DECK BUTTON. Pressing Button this button delegates the trackball to the machine (TK) for shuttle, jog or variable speed control.

4 Trackball The trackball can be used for various functions. Delegation of the trackball is done as follows: Pressing the DISPLAY BUTTON delegates the trackball to the next control in the current dialog which can receive trackball input (only possible if there is any control). Moving the trackball has the same effect as sliding the corresponding control on the touch–screen. Pressing the MACHINE DECK BUTTON delegates the trackball to the selected machine (TK). In this mode the trackball can be used as a SHUTTLE/JOG/VARI speed control.

5 Jog, Var, Shuttle 3 buttons for the transport mode selection (JOG, VAR and SHUTTLE) are below Buttons the trackball. With MACHINE DECK enabled the trackball controls the telecine in the selected mode.

6 Step Forward, The hard keys for film deck control of the telecine are located below the SHUTTLE/ Step Backward, JOG/VARI speed buttons (Step forward, Step backward, Play, Play reverse and Play Reverse, Stop). Play Forward

Note: All other dialog function buttons are explained in the separate Graphical Control Panel Manual FU 0 126 630 400.

2-10 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3. OPERATIONAL PREPARATIONS

The sections of the chapter ”Operational Preparations” have a defined order. Preceding sections are mostly precondition for the succeeding sections (such as ”Perform FPN correction” before ”Thread the film” etc.) and should therefore be considered when setting into operation.

3.1 HARDWARE CONDITIONS

GCP The Graphical Control Panel has to be connected to the Shadow Telecine. Installation

Video and audio The video and audio output signals are available at the respective output sockets. Depending on the intended further application, use the corresponding output sockets.

Note: A detailed overview on the available inputs and outputs and their applications is given in the manual ”Planning and Installation”.

Video reference Depending on further use, the video reference inputs and outputs have to be connected with the remaining application units.

Time code Depending on the application, the time code signal has to be passed on to the other units.

Keycode Reader The mounting support combined with a keycode reader head serves to generate Mounting Support the film keycode and to insert it to the DPX data output.

Monitoring If required, connect a video monitor for checking, and monitor both audio channels via the audio monitor outputs.

Data Output The option Data Output - as part of the Transfer Engine option - is required to pro- vide high speed film data - DPX or TIFF format - for recording on computer worksta- tions or Specter Virtual DataCine VDC2000.

HIPPI Serial A HiPPI serial interface - also part of the option Phantom Transfer Engine - provides Interface the high speed data transmission to a workstation / Specter via fibre optic cables.

3.2 POWER-UP

See corresponding chapter “Power-On” in the Manual ”Planning and Installation”.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-1 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.3 BASIC ADJUSTMENTS OF THE TELECINE

3.3.1 CONFIGURATION OF THE CONTROL PANEL AND DELEGATION OF OPERATIONAL CONTROL

Configuration of the graphical control panel is mostly performed only once. For details, see Customer’s Manual GCP.

After “power on” the display of the graphical control panel shows the power-up test, and subsequently the HOME menu.

Fig. 301: Home Menu

Press once the CONTROL BUTTON Ctrl to get control over the Shadow Telecine. Note: Only available if the front doors of the Shadow are closed.

3-2 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.3.2 SELECT TV STANDARD

If the momentary TV standard does not correspond to the desired standard, change the TV standard as follows. Select the main menu ”TK Config”, SDTV or HDTV submenu.

Fig. 302: TK config menu, submenu SDTV

Window SDTV / HDTV serves to choose the TV standard. The change of the TV standard is acknowledged by a beep tone.

Only those outputs are active, which are selected by the TV standard. HDTV / DTV is only available, if option HDTV / DTV is mounted in Rack 3.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-3 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

Note: When switching over the TV standard, the film drive has to be in the stop mode. Subsequently, a restart of the telecine is made with corresponding message on the display of the control panel GCP1.

TV standard

Fig. 303: Home menu with the new TV standard

3-4 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.4 USER-SPECIFIC CONFIGURATION OF THE TELECINE

3.4.1 CHANGE OPTICAL BLOCK

Fig. 304: Optical blocks of the Shadow telecine

Changing the Lens Gate Assembly (FG S16 LGA (16mm), FG FA35 LGA (35mm) optically matches the telecine to the wanted film format.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-5 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

Change

Guide rail

Handle of the optical block

Film gate

Locking lever of the optical block

Fig. 305: Optical block of the Shadow Telecine

1. Remove the threaded film from the optical block, if necessary. 2. Unlock the optical block (LGA, lens gate assembly). For this purpose, turn the locking lever of the optical block in downwards ccw direction. 3. Seize the optical block at the two handles, pull it out on its guide rails and remove it.

Attention!

When pulling out the optical block, keep a firm hold on it (approx. 8 kg) ! As soon as the optical block leaves the guide rails, it might be possible that it slides downwards.

4. Set the new optical block on the guide rails and slide it slowly towards the film deck plate until it fits. 5. Lock the lever. For this purpose, turn the locking lever of the optical block in upwards cw direction. 6. Perform FPN correction (see corresponding section).

3-6 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.4.2 CHANGE FILM GATE

Super optical blocks need an additional film gate when operating standard films.

Change 1. Open the film gate locking. For that reason hold the film gate locking lever at the lower end and pull it up. 2. Remove the built-in film gate. 3. Insert and lock the new film gate. 4. Perform FPN correction (see section 3.5).

Film gate locking lever

Film gate

Fig. 306: Film gate of the Shadow Telecine

Note:

Film Gate self-adjustment after exchange: Open the locking lever and close it again without touching the Film Gate.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-7 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.4.3 USING EFFECT FILTERS

3.4.3.1 General For generating optical effects, an effect filter set is available for the Shadow Tele- cine. The filter set (Order Number 3 119 101 003) is part of the standard accessories and is supplied with the telecine. For the various applications, 11 different supermist filters are provided, which can be easily inserted into the light path between CCD Sensor and projection lamp: D Clear supermist filters: 0.25, 0.5, 1.00, 2.00, 3.00 and optical flat (clear) D Black supermist filters: 0.25, 0.5, 1.00, 2.00, 3.00 The type of the filter Clear Supermist or Black Supermist can be identified on a label.

Clear Black Supermist 0.25

Clear Supermist 0.25 Black Supermist 0.50

Clear Supermist 0.50 Black Supermist 1

Clear Supermist 1 Black Supermist 2

Clear Supermist 2 Black Supermist 3

Clear Supermist 3

3-8 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.4.3.2 Inserting the Effect Filter

Insert the Effect filter

Guide rail for Effect filters

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-9 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.4.3.3 Focus Adjustment

The usage of light effect filters can cause de-focussing of the system. It is recommended to adjust the focus when an effect filter is being installed or changed.

Setting The focus slider controls the focus servo in the telecine. Focussing can be done either with the digipot control or by sliding on the touchscreen, for details see chapter “Adjust Focus”

Fig. 307: Home menu with Focus slider

Storing Hitting the STORE button opens a dialog window. With O.K. your new setting will be stored.

Important Notes!

Important note with regard to FPN Correction! Please ensure, that no effect filter is inserted into the optical block during: D Power up of Shadow Telecine STE (Grayscale disk alignment and FPN correction is mandatory) D Reset of Shadow Telecine from the Control Panel (Grayscale disk alignment and FPN correction is mandatory) D FPN correction Normal FPN correction should always be done without the effect filter to ensure perfect correction. If FPN is performed with a filter inserted, FPN correction will only be correct for this special filter.

3-10 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.4.4 SETUP FILMDECK

Set filmdeck settings in th main menu “TK Config”

Fig. 308: Menu TK Config

Set Core diameter Auto Stop Max Shuttle Speed 35mm Max Shuttle Speed 16mm in main menu ”SETUP”.

3.4.5 SETUP FILM

Open the main menu Film and adapt the telecine to the film to be played. Use the button “Filmtype”

Fig. 309: Film menu Configuration possibilities and explanations are to be found in the GCP Manual.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-11 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.4.6 SELECTING TV RATIO 4:3 / 16:9

Open then main menu TK Config, select submenu SDTV

Fig. 310: Main menu TK Config submenu SDTV

Press button “SDTV Ratio” and select 4:3 or 16:9.

3.4.7 SELECT SPEED

Open then main menu TK Config

Fig. 311: Menu TK Config

Select or adjust a fixed (or a variable) film speed for the telecine. Selection of the film speeds and explanations, see GCP manual.

3-12 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.5 PERFORM FPN CORRECTION

FRMY Play Play Stand F1 F2 FPN I A " by Shuttle Focus S8 S16 FPN I Step Stop Step Remote FRMB A"J

FPN correction: Press both FPN buttons together

Fig. 312: Local control panel of the Shadow Telecine

Performing a FPN (Fixed Pattern Noise) correction effects an automatic noise signal compensation in the white as well as an automatic white balance adjustment.

FPN (Fixed Pattern Noise): – noise signal in the white signal

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-13 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

FPN conditions 1. Perform FPN the first time after a “warm up” of about 15 minutes. 2. Perform FPN before threading the film!

Note! FPN correction with film: picture adjustment useless and thermal film damage possible! 3. Repeat FPN, if the environment temperature changes by more than $5°C. 4. Repeat FPN to compensate illumination level losses, if the environment temperature changes by more than $2°C.

Performing the Press both FPN buttons together (Stand by OFF). FPN correction During the automatic FPN correction (duration approx. 1 minutes) both FPN keys are lit.

If both FPN buttons blink, a FPN correction has to be performed. The buttons should blink: 1. After switching on the Shadow Telecine 2. After changing the optical block 3. After changing the film gate If only the lower FPN button blinks after switching on the device the grayscale disk alignment GDA process during the boot sequence was not successful. Remove the trouble and press both FPN buttons together to perform a new grayscale disk alignment including a FPN correction.

Note!

S8mm Performing FPN correction for S8mm film scanning, see optional manual Film Scanning “S8mm Scanning”.

3-14 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.6 THREAD THE FILM

Thread the film according to the film threading path printed on the film deck. Before the film can be threaded, the following preparations have to be made.

3.6.1 DEFINE WINDING DIRECTION

The both switches A/B on the film deck are to be set in position A (= PLAY position) for normal film operation. During operation both film reels wind anti-clockwise. Position B is used only for rewinding a film wound side-inverted.

STE -B1

BA B A A B WIND WIND WIND

Normal operation: both switches in position A

Fig. 313: Film threading path

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-15 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.6.2 REEL HOLDER SYSTEM WITH SEPARATE WINDING PLATES

3.6.2.1 Mount Winding Plates

If the film to be played is a film roll with a bobbin, winding plates have to be mounted on both reel spindles. Mounting Remove the complete locking device from the reel spindle. In addition, pull the release ring towards the release button.

Slide the winding plate onto the reel spindle.

Plug in the film bobbin onto the carrier of the winding plate.

Slide the locking device onto the reel spindle until it locks in with an audible click.

Attention!

When operating with winding plates, the inner shaft of the locking device has to protrude, otherwise press the locking button and the shaft will jump out.

Winding plate

Locking button

Release ring

Reel spindle

Locking device

Release button

Bobbin Inner shaft

Fig. 314: Mounting of the winding plates

3-16 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.6.2.2 Mount Film Reels

If the film to be played is a film reel, the full film reel has to be mounted on the left- sided reel spindle and the empty film reel on the right-sided one.

Mounting Remove the complete locking device from the respective reel spindle. For this purpose, pull the release ring towards the release button.

Slide the film reel on the reel spindle.

Plug in the film reel onto the carrier of the reel spindle.

Slide the locking device on the reel spindle until it locks in with an audible click.

Attention:

When operating with film reels, the inner shaft of the locking device has to be sunk, otherwise press the locking button and slide the inner shaft back- wards.

Locking button

Locking device

Release button Reel spindle Reel Inner shaft Release ring

Fig. 315: Mounting the film reels

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-17 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.6.3 FIXED WINDING PLATES SYSTEM

3.6.3.1 Using fixed Winding Plates

Two fixed winding plates can be mounted on the Telecine. To adapt any filmtypes to the winding plates use the inlays for bobbins or the inlays for reels as well as the two locking devices. The inlays for 16/35mm films are delivered with the Telecine or can be ordered separately (9mm spindle = FH 6609 / 8mm spindle FH 6608). The inlays for S8mm films are optional.

3.6.3.2 Scanning S8mm Films

Mandatory for scanning Super 8mm films are the special fixed winding plates, described in the next chapter and the Option “S8mm Film Scanning”.

Details see Mounting & Operating Instructions:

FU 0105 Super 8 mm Scanning

Caution!

Use the fixed winding plates for S8mm film scanning!

Fig. 316: Fixed winding plates with S8mm inlays

3-18 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.6.3.3 Mount Film Rolls

Mounting 1. Remove the complete locking device from the reel spindle. film rolls In addition, pull the release ring towards the release button.

Winding plates

Inlays for film bobbins

Fig. 317: Fixed winding-sheets with bobbin inlays

2. If the film is on a bobbin, the inlays for bobbins have to be mounted on both fixed winding plates. Release button

Bobbin

Reel spindle

Locking Device & Button

Inlay for bobbin

Fixed winding plate

Fig. 318: Mounting film rolls with bobbin

3. Plug in the film bobbin onto the carrier of the inlay. 4. Slide the locking device onto the reel spindle until it locks in with an audible click. Attention!

When operating with bobbins, the inner shaft of the locking device has to protrude, otherwise press the locking button and the shaft will jump out.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-19 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.6.3.4 Mount Film Reels

If the film to be played is a film reel, the full film reel has to be mounted on the left- sided reel spindle and the empty film reel on the right-sided one.

Winding plates

Inlays for film reels

Fig. 319: Fixed winding plates with inlays for film reel

1. Remove the complete locking device from the respective reel spindle. For this purpose, pull the release ring towards the release button.

Locking button Release ring

Locking Inlay for film reel device 16 & 35 mm

Release button

Reel spindle

Film reel

Fixed winding plate Inlay for film reel S8 mm optional

Fig. 320: Mounting the film reels

2. Mount the reel inlay to the fixed winding plate (on each side) 3. Slide the film reel on the reel spindle.

3-20 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

4. Plug in the film reel onto the carrier of the reel spindle. 5. Slide the locking device on the reel spindle until it locks in with an audible click.

Attention:

When operating with film reels, the inner shaft of the locking device has to be sunk, otherwise press the locking button and slide the inner shaft back- wards.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-21 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.6.4 THREAD FILM CORRECTLY

Film Thread direction

S8 mm film (option S8 scanning req.) Put perforation to the film deck plate 16mm film Put perforation to the film deck plate 35mm film Put audio track to the film deck plate

3.6.4.1 Winding plate operation

Slide the full film roll, as shown below, onto the left winding plate and lead the film on film path ”A” (printed on the film deck plate) to the right winding plate. Insert the film leader into the slot of the winding body and give the winding plate a few turns counterclockwise.

3.6.4.2 Film reel operation

Slide the full film reel onto the left reel spindle and lead the film on film path ”A” to the right (empty) film reel. Insert the film leader into the slot of the film reel and give the reel a few turns counterclockwise.

B A A B WIND WIND

Fig. 321: Film threading path without PT Rollers

3-22 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

B A A B WIND WIND

Fig. 322: Film threading path with PT Rollers

Note:

When threading the film into the film guiding edges of the optical block make sure that the film properly fits to the edges and that there are no emulsion deposits at the film guiding edges (for cleaning see section “Maintenance”).

Attention: If the film reel is wound up very loosely, the film can be damaged during operation. The film has to be wound up tighter. If there is no other possibility, the film can be wound once more on the telecine by means of the following steps. 1. Thread the film as usual. 2. Wind the film with 3 times the normal shuttle speed (start slowly) Note: An automatic limitation to this speed can be achieved by opening the front doors. 3. Rewind the film.

3.6.4.3 Switch to standby

Subsequently press key STAND BY on the Local Control Panel of the Shadow Tele- cine (film is tightened).

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-23 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3-24 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.7 ADJUST FRAME LINE

To achieve a correct vertical picture position for 35mm films press “Framing” key on the Local Control Panel several times. This effects a coarse correction of the frame bar downward (1 perforation hole downward per film picture). Shift frame line until it disappears under the upper or lower picture border.

or via Graphical Control Panel GCP: Select the Home menu.

Fig. 323: Home menu with ”Framing Adjust”

Shift the fame bar Shift frame bar of 35mm film by pressing the framing coarse buttons (arrows up and down) several times until the frame bar disappears under the upper or lower picture border.

The framing fine sliders allow neat vertical positioning for all film formats.

Store frame bar Pressing the STORE button enables the current setting to be stored and recalled if position you hit Unity.

Note:

For operation, first correct the frame bar and then make film/time code assignment, because shifting the frame bar by 1 frame will also shift the frame/ time code assignment. When placing the film on the sprocket wheel, take care to lace the frame bar on the cross line of the sprocket wheel. Thus, the frame bar will not be visible when playing the film.

Lace-up frame bar on the cross line

Fig. 324: Film position on the sprocket wheel

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-25 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.8 ADJUST FOCUS

Graphical Control Panel GCP1 The focus slider controls the focus servo in the telecine.

Focussing can be done either with the digipot control or by sliding on the touchscreen.

Setting Hitting the AID button sets zoom and contour to maximum and slows down the film speed to 6 fps.

Thus, film grain will appear as large and clear as possible which helps to find the optimum focus position.

Fig. 325: Home menu with focus adjust slider

Storing Hitting the STORE button and subsequently the O.K. button saves the focus value as the new default.

3-26 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.9 ADJUST SIZING FORMAT

The sizing format (scanning and reproduction format) of the Telecine is set in the sizing menu.

Preconditions 1. The TV standard is selected (i.e., line standard is determined, see section 3.3.2 Select TV Standard). 2. According to film format (16mm, S16mm, 35mm, S35mm), the suitable optical block is used (see section 3.4.1 Change Optical Block). 3. The film is threaded correctly (see section 3.6 Thread the Film). 4. The frame line is adjusted (see section 3.7 Adjust Frame Line).

3.9.1 SELECT FIXED FILM SCANNING FORMAT (FIXED ASPECT)

On the film box of the film to be played, the film scanning format (e.g. 1:1.85 / 1:2.20 / 1:2.35) is noted in addition to the film format (16mm, 35mm etc.). If this format corresponds to a fixed format (1.85 / 2.20 / 2.35), the following steps are necessary.

Selection Where? Function

Control 1. Press key sizing The sizing menu appears. panel

1080 60 I 24500 x 19000 12250 / 9307 21110 x 19000 18750 / 9306 21102 x 19000 18750 / 9500

Fig. 326: Sizing menu

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-27 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

Selection Where? Function

Select a fixed scan format by pressing “Fixed Aspect” Touch 2. Select submenu “Repro” and screen according to the specification of the film scanning format on the film box.

1207 x 1079 959 x 549

21.25 19.00 18.75

Fig. 327: Sizing menu, submenu Repro

3-28 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.9.2 SELECT FIXED REPRODUCTION FORMAT (FIXED REPRO)

When selecting a fixed film scanning format, a suitable reproduction format is selected each time automatically for this film. If an other reproduction format should be wanted nevertheless, proceed as follows.

Selection Where? Function

Control 3. Press button Sizing The Sizing menu appears. panel

Select button ”fixed repro” Touch 4. Select the submenu “Repro” screen The reproduction formats appears on the screen.

1207 x 1079 959 x 549

21.25 19.00 18.75

Fig. 328: Submenu Repro

Select further adjustments Make a new selection pull down in the ”Sizing menu” 5. by pressing one of the repro for- if necessary mats menu

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-29 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.9.3 ADJUST SIZING FORMAT VARIABLY

If the fixed reproduction format (as selected in section 3.9.2) does not yet correspond to the requests, the reproduction format can also be adjusted variably.

Selection Where? Function

Control 6. Press button Sizing The Sizing menu appears. panel

Touch Sets sizing adjustments 7. Select Size Window screen to default values.

1080 60 I 24500 x 19000 12250 / 9307 21110 x 19000 18750 / 9306 21102 x 19000 18750 / 9500

Fig. 329: Sizing menu

Click on the area to activate the Adjust with the digipot digipot control. or slide on the touchscreen 8. Window When active, the sliders are the vertical and horizontal highlighted reproduction format

Pay attention to the picture geometry, i.e. a circle has to be reproduced as a circle.

3-30 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.9.4 ADJUST HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL BLANKING

Selection Where? Function

Control 9. Press button Sizing The Sizing menu appears. panel

Sizing Submenu ”Blanking” 10. Select submenu Blanking menu appears.

1201 x 1151 959 x 575

Fig. 330: Submenu Blanking

The Film blanking adjustments (Size and Position) determine the section of the picture which is written into the frame store. Film blanking becomes part of the picture Select the Film button Submenu (with only black content) 11. Blanking Adjust with the digipot or sliders the vertical blanking, and the horizontal blanking.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-31 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

Selection Where? Function

The TV blanking adjustments (Size and Position) determine the section of the picture which is read out of the frame store. TV blanking is not part of the picture. It be- haves like an external blanking rendered by a production switcher.

Adjust with the digipot or sliders Select the TV button Submenu the vertical blanking, 12. Blanking and the horizontal blanking.

The blanking settings should limit film picture content only slightly. Vertical frame line corrections have to be made before as described in section 3.7

3-32 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.10 MATCHING TO DIFFERENT COLOR AND MONOCHROME FILM TYPES

Precondition for this section are the preceding sections of chapter 3. The most important ones are: 1. Shadow Telecine user-specifically configurated 2. FPN correction performed 3. Film threaded 4. Frame line optimized 5. Picture optically focused 6. Sizing format adjusted

3.10.1 DEFINE FILM TYPE

Select Where? Adjust function

Control 1. Press button Film The Film menu appears panel

Fig. 331: Film menu

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-33 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

Select Where? Adjust function

left to the Double click Adjusts standard values for 2. touch– function button ”unity ALL” the complete film menu. screen

Make your choice from the drop-down menu. For each filter type, positive and negative 3. Select button Film Type Film menu setting are available. This function also switches the gamma according to the selected film type.

Fig. 332: Film menu with drop down menu ”Film Type”

Defines the following film types: Print Positive Print Negative Intermediate Pos. Depending on film to be played, Pop-down Intermediate Neg. 4. select one of the film types menu Primetime Pos. Primetime Neg. Color Positive Color Negative

3-34 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.10.2 ADJUST FILM MASKING

Select Where? Adjust function

For matching to special films, 5. select submenu Film Menu Opens submenu ”Film masking” “Masking”,

comm_1 comm_1 comm_2 comm_3 1.0000. 0.000 comm_4

0.0001. comm_5 0.000 comm_6 0.000 0. 1.000 comm_7 comm_8 TCP5285 TCPLIMX spec_1

Fig. 333: Submenu ”Film masking with pull–down menu matrix

Click button Matrix. Judge the color reproduction Select fixed, preadjusted in the output picture 6. matrix coefficients and via WFM output from the drop-down menu. testpoint 4 Mask/CRT Gamma

For test purposes use testpoint 4 Mask / CRT Gamma

Menu Monitoring

Fig. 334: Menu Monitoring, submenu Test Points

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-35 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

Select Where? Adjust function

If the correct color reproduction An additional window “Enter new Matrix” in the output pictures not yet opens and a two lined keypad is activated in 7. achieved, click on new matrix in the top of the menu. the drop–down menu

Fig. 335: Set new matrix name

Confirm by pressing the OK button. Type in the name for the new Submenu 8. Now the coefficients in the matrix window matrix coefficient Masking can be modified.

3-36 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

Select Where? Adjust function

Clicking on the coefficients Submenu Type in your modified values and confirm by 9. opens numeric keypad on the top Masking pressing OK. of the menu.

Fig. 336: Set coefficients

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-37 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.10.3 ADJUST INTENSITY OF FILM ILLUMINATION

Select Where? Adjust function

Control 10. Press menu button Film The Film menu appears panel

85%

Slide CCD Output 100 % for 100 % video level

Flash button

100 %

Fig. 337: Film menu

For test purposes use testpoint 1 ASP / A/D Menu Monitoring

Fig. 338: Menu Monitoring, submenu Test Point

The amount of light falling via the film on the Shift slider “Light” 11. Film Menu CCDs can be controlled. or use the trackball

3-38 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

Select Where? Adjust function

Search for a scene with low film density (bright lights, clouds or similar) and adjust the intensity of film illumination in such a way that the brightest one of the RGB video signals reaches a level of 100 % (oscilloscope). ”CCD Output Level Display: Run film During adjustment watch the CCD Output 12. for adjusting Level Display! the intensity of film illumination Make sure that this level is around 85%.

Or during Play: Pressing the “Flash button” sets film illumination intensity at once to maximum CCD output level. If 100 % video level is not reached, switch video basic gain to + 6 dB (see section 3.10.4) and adjust the film illumination intensity again.

13. Re-wind film

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-39 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.10.4 ADJUST ANALOG SIGNAL BASIC GAIN

Select Where? Adjust function

Opens pull down menu and shows the pos- 14. Press button Gain Film Menu sible selections for analog basic gain.

100 %

Fig. 339: Film menu with pull down menu Gain

Run film With very dense film material, 15. for judging the film density use basic gain ”6 dB”.

Pulldown Selection ”6 dB” 16. Select 6dB menu doubles now the analog gain.

3-40 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

For test purposes use testpoint 1 ASP / A/D Menu Monitoring

Fig. 340: Menu Monitoring, submenu Test Point

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-41 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.10.5 ADJUST WHITE LEVEL (AND BLACK LEVEL)

Select Where? Adjust function

Control 17. Press menu button Film The Film menu appears panel

100 %

Fig. 341: Film menu

For test purposes use testpoint 3 Gain / Lift Menu Monitoring

Fig. 342: Menu Monitoring, submenu Test Point

Run telecine Search for a scene with picture white 18. for adjusting the white level (or picture black) and stop. (and then the black level)

3-42 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

Select Where? Adjust function

Adjust picture white in the R, G and B channels Matching Gain with the corresponding digipot controls or by for the white level adjustment sliding on the touch screen matching Gain 19. & Film menu in all channels to 100 % video signal. Matching Lift Adjust picture black for the black level adjustment in the R, G and B channels in matching lift RGB to 1 % setup)

This is the basic adjustment for the film to be played. Color corrections during later operation 20. Re-wind film (scene for scene) are made via the Color menu.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-43 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.10.6 ADJUST BLACK LEVEL

Select Where? Adjust function

Control The Color menu with submenu 21. Press menu button “Color” Panel Primary color correction appears

Fig. 343: Color menu

For test purposes use testpoint 4 Mask / CRT Gamma

Menu Monitoring

Fig. 344: Menu Monitoring, submenu Test Point

Search for a film scene with a Run film for adjusting 22. black object the black levels and stop.

Note: Adjustments of Black Master and Black RGB do not change White level.

3-44 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

Select Where? Adjust function

Black Master controls the dark parts of the pic- Color Adjust the relevant channels 23. ture. menu to 1 % black signal level Slide Black on the touchscreen

Black RGB magnitude and phase for R, G or B black level adjustment. Adjust the relevant channels to 1 % black signal level Slide directly on the colored hexagon of the touchscreen or use the Color 24. trackball. menu By clicking on the area around the The adjustments are judged on the color hexagon, the control is delegated monitor and changed until an optimum to the trackball. black level reproduction is achieved. The cursor inside the hexagon indicates the working position.

25. Re-wind film

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-45 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.10.7 ADJUST WHITE LEVEL

Select Where? Adjust function

Control 26. Color menu Panel

Fig. 345: Color menu

Search for a film scene with a Run film for adjusting 27. white object the white levels and stop.

White (Master) Touch Adjust the relevant channels 28. slide White on the touch screen screen to 100 % white level

White (RGB) magnitude and phase for R, G or B white level adjustment Adjust the relevant channels to 100 % white level Slide directly on the colored hexa- The actual adjustment is displayed with cur- gon of the touchscreen or use the sor in the RGB hexagon trackball. By clicking on the area around the The adjustments are judged on the color hexagon, the control is delegated monitor and changed until an optimum to the trackball. white level reproduction is achieved. The cursor inside the hexagon indicates the working position.

Note: Adjustments of White Master and White RGB do not change Black level.

3-46 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.10.8 ADJUST GRAY LEVEL (GAMMA MASTER & GAMMA RGB)

Select Where? Adjust function

Control 29. Color menu panel

Fig. 346: Color menu

Search for a film scene with a Run film for adjusting 30. medium gradation the medium gray levels and stop.

Select Gamma Color The relevant channels become 31. slide Gamma on the screen Menu adjustable for the gray levels

Gamma RGB magnitude and phase for R, G or B gray level adjustment The actual adjustment is displayed with cur- Slide directly on the colored hexa- sor in the Gamma hexagon gon of the touchscreen or use the 32. trackball. By clicking on the area around the The adjustments are judged on the color hexagon, the control is delegated monitor and changed until an optimum gray to the trackball. level reproduction is achieved. The cursor inside the hexagon indicates the working position. 33. Rewind film

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-47 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.10.9 ADJUST CONTOUR AND CORING

Select Where? Adjust function

Control 34. select Sharp menu panel

Fig. 347: Sharp menu

For test purposes use testpoint 5 Sizing / Matrix / Contour

Menu Monitoring

Fig. 348: Menu Monitoring, submenu Test Point

For adjustment search the ap- Contour adjustment: propriate film picture and operate picture with fine and coarse details 35. the telecine in the still frame Coring adjustment: mode. picture with noise in the black areas

3-48 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

Select Where? Adjust function

Select Contour Set Contour correction for optimum H and V This adjustment only addresses contour with coring set to 0%. For that adjust CONTOUR Balance to 36. the luminance signal. Sharp menu A Black and White transition ap- H3/V3. pears more contrast and there- PEAK FREQUENCY H/V to coarse (e.g.“1”) fore sharper or fine details (e.g. ”7”).

Select Coring Adjust for optimum picture contents with the digipot or slide on the touch screen. Coring enhanced contour correction in dependence on detail contrast. Increase coring from 0% until the optimal grain suppression in the black areas is 37. Sharp menu 0% Coring (default setting): reached. Repeat contour adjustment, if nec- the selected contour correction essary. applies to all details of the picture.

100% Coring: only the high contrast details are enhanced (they will get broad contours).

Select Peaking Frequency

Horizontal and Vertical This function offers contour en- Increase Peak Frequency H&V to enhance hancement in dependence on small picture details. detail size (spatial frequency) 38. Sharp menu In order to enhance small picture details, select a higher value. Repeat contour adjustment, if necessary. Higher value correspond to high frequencies. to enhance contours of coarse details, select a low value.

Closes Sharp menu, Control 39. Select menu Home stores new Contour adjustments panel and returns to the Home menu.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-49 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.11 ADJUST AUDIO CHANNELS (OPTION)

Before leveling the audio channels, first adapt them to the studio environment. For adaption, select the Audio Config menu. This menu determines with its submenus the sequence for proceeding (from left to right, see below).

3.11.1 SELECT AUDIO SOURCES

Requirements 1. Depending on the film format (16mm, S16mm*, 35mm, S35mm*), the optical block suitable to the film to be played is used. 2. The film is threaded correctly and ready for play.

* S16 and S35 films have no own audio track. External audio sources, such as SEPMAG via INPUT EXTERN 1, 2 are usually selected as audio sources.

Select Where? Adjust function

Touch button Audio Control 1. & The Audio Configuration menu appears panel select submenu A Config

Fig. 349: Audio Config menu

3-50 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

Select Where? Adjust function

Audio Window 2. Touch Source section Config ”Input Source” Menu is opened

Fig. 350: Audio Config menu with pull-down menu ”Input Source”

Depending on the film used, select audio source for audio channel CH 1.

Magnetical for Sepmag Units Pull down 3. Touch button Source Channel 1 menu Optical for light sound Ext 1/2 External sources Test Tone 1 or 10 KHz

Pull down 4. Touch button Source Channel 2 Select audio source for channel CH 2 menu

To exit the window, click on the Pull down 5. Close window Close button menu

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-51 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.11.2 PRE-EQUALIZE AUDIO SOURCES

Note: Function “Pre-Adjust” is only operable for the service by means of a service code.

Select Where? Adjust function

The window ”Pre-Adjust” appears. Audio Select Preadjust section This window contains basic 6. Config factory settings for menu pre-amplifier levels & pre-equalizing

Fig. 351: Audio Config menu with window ”Pre-Adjust”

Both audio channels are exactly factory-preadjusted. Therefore, input level and pre-equalization need no further correction. Adjustments have to be performed by service personnel only (special test films required). For further details see chapter 6.8 “Change Comopt Sound Lamp” in this manual.

3-52 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.11.3 ADJUST DOLBY NOISE REDUCTION

Select Where? Adjust function

Audio The window ”Noise Reduction” 7. Touch Dolby section Config appears. menu

Fig. 352: Audio Config menu with window ”Setup Noise Reduction”

Depending on the film used, (with dolbysated audio), 8. Press Channel 1/2 Noise Red Window select the noise reduction mode.

Dolby A: not selectable

Dolby SR: Noise reduction via external dolby SR add-on unit (SR: Spectral Recording) OFF: Film without dolby audio

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-53 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

Select Where? Adjust function

Adjust dolby level: (only for external dolby SR device) 1. Switch on dolby test tone on external device and read deflection on its indicating instrument. 2. Play film with dolby test tone on the tele- 9. Press Channel 1/2 NR level Window cine and also read the deflection on the external indicating instrument. 3. Change adjustment at the telecine until test tone level and telecine level show the same reading. Adjustment of the dolby level is made by pressing “Gang” and turning digipot dial.

10. Press button Close Window Close window

3-54 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.11.4 SELECT LOWPASS FILTER

Select Where? Adjust function

Audio The window ”Low Pass” 11. Touch Low Pass section Config appears menu

Fig. 353: Audio Config menu with window ”Low Pass Filter”

Run film 12. (for judging the film sound)

Depending on the film sound quality, Press button Pull down 13. switch on or off the lowpass filter. Channel 1/2 Low Pass menu .

None: Film audio channel is not filtered 5 kHz: Film audio channel is filtered

14. Re-wind film

15. Press button Close Window Close window

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-55 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.11.5 SYNCHRONIZE DIGITAL AUDIO CHANNELS

Select Where? Adjust function

Audio Window ”A/D Converter Reference” 16. Touch A/D Convert section Config appears menu

Fig. 354: Audio Config menu with window ”A/D Convert”

Depending on the succeeding audio studio, Touch A/D Convert Ref lock the digital film sound of the telecine & either with its own video signal (standard) 17. Select Window or use an external 48kHz synchronization int. Video when it is also used for synchronization of or the external audio studio. ext. 48KHz

int Video: Digital audio channels are video-locked ext 48 kHz: Digital audio channels are synchronized on 48 kHz

18. Press button Close Window Close window

3-56 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.11.6 SELECT PREEMPHASIS

Select Where? Adjust function

Audio Touch Pre-Emphasis The window ”Pre-emphasis” 19. Config section appears menu

Fig. 355: Audio Config menu with window ”Setup Pre-Emphasis”

For improving the signal-to-noise ratio prior to A/D conversion or for adaption to other contributions in the digital audio studio, Press button the digital audio channels of the telecine Pre-Emphasis 20. Window can be provided with a preemphasis. & select On or Off Pre-emph: peaking of frequency components prior to A/D conversion; reduction after D/A conversion

OFF: Preemphasis off (standard) ON: Preemphasis on (CD-type preemphasis, EQ time constant: 50/15 µs)

21. Press Close Window Close window

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-57 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.11.7 SELECT MONO/STEREO OPERATION

Select Where? Adjust function

Audio 22. Select Channel Mode section Config Window ”Channel Mode” appears menu

Fig. 356: Audio Config menu with window ”Channel Mode”

Press button Channel Mode Depending on the film used & select Pull down (mono or stereo film), 23. 2 Channel menu select the audio channel mode. or Single Channel

Single Channel (Mono) Analog output 1 = audio 1 Analog output 2 = audio 1 Subfr. A in the digital AES output. = audio 1 Subfr. B in the digital AES output. = audio 1

2 CHANNEL (Stereo): Analog output 1 = audio 1 Analog output 2 = audio 2 Subfr. A in the digital AES output = audio 1 Subfr. B in the digital AES output = audio 2

3-58 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

Select Where? Adjust function

MONO (for stereo film): Analog output 1 = audio 1 + 2 mixed* Analog output 2 = audio 1 + 2 mixed* Subfr. A+B mixed/dig. AES output = Audio 1* Subfr. A+B mixed/dig. AES output = Audio 2*

* In order to avoid overmodulation, the output levels of the mixed audio signals are reduced by 4.5 dB.

24. Press button Close Window Close window

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-59 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.11.8 ADJUST LIP-SYNCHRONOUS FILM SOUND

Select Where? Adjust function

Audio The window ”Channel Delay” 25. Press Delay section Config appears menu

Fig. 357: Audio Config menu with window ”Setup Channel Delay”

When playing a film, picture and sound are Run film always lip-synchronous at the output for judging of the telecine. 26. lip synchronism. The adjustable audio channel delay Compare picture and sound only compensates film frame delays caused at the studio output. for example by a succeeding video studio.

Depending on the delay between Adjust the delays by sliding on picture and sound, 27. the touchscreen or use the digi- Window delay the film sound pot control (for stereo in both channels). The adjustable delay depends on the film format and is approx. within 0 and 1.2 s (in steps of 10 ms). 28. Re-wind film

29. Press button Close Window Close window

3-60 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.11.9 CHECK FILM AUDIO PATHS WITH TEST TONE

Select Where? Adjust function

Audio Window ”Test Tone” 30. Press Test Tone section Config appears and the finally selected test tone is menu indicated.

Fig. 358: Audio Config menu with window ”Test Tone”

Depending on the requirement, 31. Press button Test Tone Window select 1 kHz or 10 kHz test tone.

32. Press button Close Window Close window

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-61 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

Select Where? Adjust function

Audio The window ”Setup Input Source” 33. Press Source section Config appears. menu

Fig. 359: Audio Config menu with window ”Input Source”

For turning on the test tone, Press button 34. Window select ”TEST.” Source Channel 1 / 2

Check film audio path in the studio.

35. Press button Close Window Close window (and switch off test tone).

3-62 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.11.10 ADJUST STUDIO LEVEL

Select Where? Adjust function

Press menu button Control 36. The Audio Level menu appears. Audio Levels panel

Press button Setup Audio Pulldown menu ”Audio Level Setup” 37. & Level appears. button Studio Level menu

Note! D The internal test tone level of the Telecine is at 0VU.

D Scale zero point is at the 28% audio modu- lation level for COM- OPT. D The zero point of the scale is set to full scale db fs

Fig. 360: Audio Level menu with window ”Audio Level Setup”

Touch button Studio Level Depending on the requirement, Pulldown 38. and make your selection adjust the studio level menu in the pulldown menu –3 dBu, 0 dBu, 4 dBu or 8 dBu.

Note: With unbalanced load, the audio level is automatically reduced by 6 dB, when a studio level of +4 or +8 dBu is selected.

39. Press button Close Close window

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-63 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.11.11 ADAPT AUDIO OUTPUTS (BALANCED / UNBALANCED) TO STUDIO INPUTS

Select Where? Adjust function

Control 40. Press button Audio Level The Audio Level menu appears. panel

Audio Drop-down menu ”Audio Level Setup” 41. Press button Setup Level appears. menu

Fig. 361: Audio Level menu with window ”Audio Level Setup”

Touch button Channel 1/2 Adapt the outputs of the telecine and A1, A2, Monitoring and Dolby Stereo, 42. make your selection Window according to the available studio inputs “unbalanced or unbalanced” unbalanced or balanced

Note: With unbalanced load, the audio level is automatically reduced by 6 dB, when a studio level of +4 or +8 dBu is selected.

43. Press button Close Window Close window

3-64 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.11.12 ADJUST HEADPHONE & MONITORING VOLUME

Select Where? Adjust function

Control 44. Press button Audio Levels The Audio Levels menu appears. panel

Fig. 362: Audio Level menu

Touch Adjust the volume controls according to Headphone requirement. 45. Mon left (for mono) Menu To modify, slide the controls on the touch- Mon Left and Right (for stereo) screen ore use the digipot controls attenuators

Control 46. Press button Close Return to the Home menu panel

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-65 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.11.13 ADJUST SEPMAG CHANNELS

Select Where? Adjust function

Press menu button Special Control 47. & The sub menu Extern D appears. panel Submenu Extern D

Press button The pull down menu “Biphase / Timecode 48. Menu Sepmag Coupling Source is opened

Fig. 363: Special Menu with Submenu Extern D

49. Select Source “Biphase” Menu

2x Biphase: Select Sepmag coupling for Sepmag units with 2 pulses per frame synchronization 50. Menu according to the (at connection SEPMAG OUT / Rack 2) Sepmag unit used 10x Biphase: for Sepmag units with 10 pulses per frame synchronization

Fig. 364: Special Menu with Submenu Extern D

3-66 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

Select Where? Adjust function

Press menu button Control 51. The Audio Config menu appears. Audio Config panel

Audio The window 52. Select Input Source section Config Source Channel 1/2 menu appears.

Fig. 365: Audio Config menu with window ”Input Source”

Select the audio sources Press button according to Sepmag unit used Source channel 1/2 (mono or stereo). & Mono: Select CH1, 2: each “Extern1” 53. Ext1 / EXT2 Window Stereo: CH1: “Extern 1” for Sepmag mode CH2: “Extern 2”

Control 54. Press key Close Return to the menu panel

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-67 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.12 USING ARRI, AATON OR EVERTZ KEYCODE READERS

3.12.1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

These servicing instructions are for use by qualified and trained service personnel only.

To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not perform any installations other than that contained in the Operating Instructions unless you are qualified to do so. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

Precaution when installing the Keycode Reader Mounting Set

D To reduce risk of electric shock, do not perform any installation without switching off the STE-B1 Telecine. D Observe EMC regulations!

To avoid EMC problems, all keycode reader cables must be wrapped in knitted wire mesh tape. The so shielded cables must be connected to ground potential at the film deck and at the terminal panel via the corresponding cable feed- through.

Precaution when operating! Pay attention to the film guide, danger of scratching the film!

D Check the proper film run always with a test film.

D The film should never contact the knurled fixing knobs of the keycode readers.

D Do not run the film through the keycode readers when the devices are in park position.

D Do not change the position of the keycode reader during any operation!

D Do not use a film loop when a keycode reader is in park position.

D Do not mount single keycode heads in the positions which are designed to be used in combination of an ARRI head together with EVERTZ or AATON units.

3-68 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.12.2 GENERAL

The Keycode Reader Mounting Set is designed to facilitate the installation of the 16mm / 35mm keycode readers from the manufacturers AATON, EVERTZ and ARRI. The base plate feature ”Park Position” enables to set a reader from the read position into the park position without the need to disconnect the cables of the reader.

Note:

For instructions relating to the specific adjustment of the keycode readers themselves, please refer to the documentation of the respective manufacturer AATON, EVERTZ and ARRI.

3.12.3 TOOLS REQUIRED

Installation of the the key code readers requires the following tools: 1. Allan key 2 mm 2. Allan key 2.5 mm 3. Allan key 3 mm 4. Phillips screw driver 5. Screw driver size 1

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-69 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.12.4 OVERVIEW MOUNTING SET

The mounting set consists of the following parts:

3 2 1

5 6 7 14pcs

Fig. 366: Contents of the mounting set

1 Mounting plate with knurled knob for ARRI reader 2 Mounting plate with knurled knob for EVERTZ reader 3 Mounting plate with knurled knob and roller for AATON reader 4 Clamping ring for damping roller 5 Cable tie, 14 pcs. 6 4 Phillips screws M3 7 4 Fixing plate for cable tie 8 10 meters shield wrap knitted wire mesh 1.5 inches wide

3-70 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.12.5 MOUNTING THE KEYCODE READERS ON THE RESPECTIVE MOUNTING PLATE

3.12.5.1 ARRI Reader

1. Lead the Mini Sub-D connector 1 Figure 367 of the ARRI reader cable from below through the opening 2 of the ARRI mounting plate.

3 1

Fig. 367:

2. Fasten the Mini Sub-D connector with two screws 4 Figure 368 (parts of the ARRI reader) on the top side of the ARRI mounting plate. Put the cable into the groove at the bottom side of the ARRI mounting plate and fix it with the two slotted screws 3 Figure 367.

Fig. 368:

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-71 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3. Slide the ARRI 16mm or 35mm keycode reader 1 onto the mounted ARRI Mini Sub-D connector 2 and fasten it with the two hex socket-head screws 3 Figure 369 (parts of the keycode reader) using an Allan key of 2.5 mm.

The keycode reader is now mounted on its base plate.

ARRI 16mm Reader ARRI 35mm Reader

1 1

3 3 3 3

2 2

Fig. 369: ARRI mounting plate and ARRI reader

3-72 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.12.5.2 AATON Reader

3 1

Fig. 370: AATON mounting plate and reader

Put the AATON keycode reader 1 onto the clamp fitting 2 and clamp it with the hex socket-head screw 3 , Figures 370 and 371.

Preadjustment: Adjust the position of the AATON reader in such a way that the edge of the reader 4 is in parallel to the edge of the mounting plate 5 , Figure 371.

3 2 4 5

Fig. 371: AATON keycode reader on AATON mounting plate

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-73 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.12.5.3 EVERTZ Reader

Fig. 372: EVERTZ mounting plate and reader

Put the EVERTZ keycode reader 1 onto the clamp fitting 2 and clamp it with the hex socket-head screw 3 .

Preadjustment: Adjust the position of the EVERTZ reader in such a way that the pin hole 4 is cov- ered half by the EVERTZ reader.

2 3

Fig. 373: EVERTZ keycode reader on EVERTZ mounting plate

3-74 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.12.6 MOUNTING SINGLE KEYCODE READER VERSION ON THE FILMDECK BASE PLATE

Two mounting versions of the keycode readers are possible: D Single keycode reader version D Dual keycode reader version The filmdeck base plate is marked with thin, bold and dot lines (Fig. 374).

Fig. 375 and Fig. 376 show the mounting positions of the keycode readers when using one keycode reader. The thin outlines on the base plate show the single reader positions. The dot outlines shows the parking position of the keycode readers.

Fig. 374: Base plate without mounted keycode readers

Attention!

When using one keycode reader, put it only on its single position (gray areas Fig. 375 and Fig. 376, thin line on the base plate). When setting readers on the dual position, the film may be scratched!

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-75 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

SINGLE readers ARRI

PARKING position

AATON/EVERTZ

Fig. 375: One Keycode reader position (ARRI)

SINGLE readers ARRI

PARKING position

AATON/EVERTZ

Fig. 376: One Keycode reader position (AATON/EVERTZ)

3-76 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.12.6.1 Mounting ARRI Keycode Reader

Put the ARRI keycode reader (16 or 35 mm) with its mounting plate in the provided position for the single operation onto the base plate and fasten it with the knurled screw 1 , see fig. 377.

SINGLE readers

AATON/EVERTZ ARRI

PARKING position

AATON/EVERTZ

Fig. 377: ARRI reader in single position

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-77 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.12.6.2 Mounting AATON Keycode Reader

Put the AATON keycode reader with its mounting plate in the provided position for the single operation onto the base plate and fasten it with the knurled screw 1 , see fig. 378.

SINGLE readers ARRI

PARKING position

AATON/EVERTZ

Fig. 378: AATON keycode reader in single position

The keycode reader has to be fasten on the clamp fitting in such a way that it does not impede the film run and does scratch the film.

Note!

See AATON manual for fine adjustment of the keycode reader head!

3-78 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.12.6.3 Mounting EVERTZ Keycode Reader

Put the EVERTZ keycode reader with its mounting plate in the provided position for the single operation onto the base plate and fasten it with the knurled screw 1 , fig. 379.

SINGLE readers ARRI

PARKING position

AATON/EVERTZ

Fig. 379: EVERTZ keycode reader in single position

The keycode reader has to be fasten on the clamp fitting in such a way that it does not impede the film run and does not scratch the film.

Note!

See EVERTZ manual for fine adjustment of the keycode reader head!

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-79 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.12.6.4 Deflection Roller Adjustment (AATON Reader)

Fig. 380: Deflection roller adjustment

For adjusting the additional AATON deflection roller 2 , loosen the clamp screw 1 with an Allan key and adjust the deflection roller according to Fig. 381. Tighten the clamp screw again.

2 Fig. 381: Film run adjustment

Make sure that the film edges do not touch the edges of the guide roller 2 .

3-80 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.12.7 PARKING POSITION OF THE KEYCODE READERS

ATTENTION!

Do not use a film loop when a keycode reader is mounted in parking position!

3.12.7.1 ARRI Keycode Reader

When the ARRI keycode reader is not used, mount it in its parking position. For this purpose, loosen the knurled screw, put the reader on the parking position and fasten it with the knurled screw.

SINGLE readers ARRI

PARKING position

AATON/EVERTZ

Fig. 382: Parking position for ARRI keycode reader

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-81 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.12.7.2 AATON / EVERTZ Keycode Reader

When the AATON or EVERTZ keycode reader is not used, mount it in its parking position. For this purpose, put the reader on the parking position and fasten it with the knurled screw.

SINGLE readers ARRI

PARKING position

AATON/EVERTZ

Fig. 383: Parking position for AATON / EVERTZ keycode reader

3-82 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.12.8 MOUNTING DUAL KEYCODE READERS VERSION

Fig. 384 shows the mounting positions of the keycode readers when being used in dual operation. The bold lines on the base plate show the dual reader positions.

SINGLE readers ARRI

PARKING position

AATON/EVERTZ

Abb. 384: Dual reader positions

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-83 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.12.8.1 ARRI and AATON Keycode Readers

1. Put both keycode readers on their positions as dual readers and fasten them with the knurled screws 1 , Fig. 385.

SINGLE readers ARRI

1 PARKING position

AATON/EVERTZ

Abb. 385: ARRI and AATON readers in film run

2. Check the film run.

Note! See EVERTZ manual for fine adjustment of the keycode reader head!

Fig. 386: Film run adjustment

Make sure that the film edges do not touch the edges of the guide roller 1 .

3-84 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.12.8.2 ARRI and EVERTZ Keycode Readers

1. Put both keycode readers on their positions as dual readers and fasten them with the knurled screws 1 , Fig. 387.

2. Check film run as above.

SINGLE readers ARRI

1 PARKING position

AATON/EVERTZ

Fig. 387: ARRI and EVERTZ readers in film run

Note! See EVERTZ customer’s manual for fine adjustment of the keycode reader head!

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-85 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.12.9 USAGE OF THE PARKING POSITION IN CASE OF DUAL READER VERSION

Fig. 388 shows the mounting positions of the keycode readers when being used in combination of park and read position.

SINGLE readers ARRI

PARKING position

AATON/EVERTZ

Abb. 388: Possible ARRI reader parking position when using two readers

3-86 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.12.9.1 ARRI and EVERTZ Keycode Reader

Only possible in combination with ARRI and EVERTZ reader)

Put the ARRI reader 1 on the parking position and fasten it with the knurled screw. Set the EVERTZ reader 2 to single position and fasten it also with the knurled screw.

SINGLE readers

PARKING position

AATON/EVERTZ

Abb. 389: ARRI reader in parking position and Evertz reader in film run

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-87 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

3.12.10 ARRESTING THE SWING ARM OF THE DAMPING ROLLER

If, under certain operational conditions (e.g. film splices) counting errors are occurring with the keycode reader, the motion of the damping roller 1 can be inhibited afterwards by arresting the swing arm with the clamping ring 2 .

For this purpose, the internal swing arm is turned to its upper end stop by loosening the grub screw 3 and rotating the clamping ring 2 in clockwise direction, position FIXED.

For securing the clamping ring in the new position, tighten the grub screw 3 again with a 2mm Allan key.

3 2 1

Fig. 390: Arresting the swing arm

3-88 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

3.12.11 CABLING THE KEYCODE READERS

Attention! Prior to laying the keycode reader cables they have to be wrapped with shield wrap mesh according to section 3.12.12!

The cables of the keycode readers can be laid between the base plate and the film deck. Subsequently, they are fed through the corresponding cable feed-through 2 and through the Shadow Telecine to the EMC Terminal Panel. For this purpose, fasten the reader cables with Philips screw M3 and fixing plate and cable tie to the bores 1 of the base plate.

2 1 Fig. 391: Cable fastening points at the base plate

Cable feed-through Steadiscan

Cable feed-through ARRI keycode reader

Cable feed-through Cable feed-through EVERTZ keycode AATON keycode reader reader Fig. 392: Cable feed-through in the filmdeck

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-89 3. Operational Preparations STE-B1

Note! Feed always only one cable through one opening

Feed the cable through the cabinet and fasten it. Feed the cable through the connection terminal at the rear and ground the wire mesh at the feed-through. For details refer to the Installation Manual.

3.12.12 EMV REQUIREMENTS

To avoid EMV / EMC problems, all reader cables have to be wrapped with knitted wire mesh from the cable feed-through in the film deck up to the connection terminal at the Shadow Telecine. Earth contact has to be made at the cable feed-through (film deck) and at the connection terminal (rear of telecine).

Fig. 393: Wrapping with knitted wire mesh shield

Fix the knitted wire mesh shield at beginning and end of the reader cable with a cable tie.

3-90 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 3-91 STE-B1 4.1 Basic Menu Control GCP

4. MENU CONTROL

4.1 BASIC MENU CONTROL WITH GRAPHICAL CONTROL PANEL GCP The highly sophisticated Graphical Control Panel GCP1 is designed to control the Shadow Telecine. It provides equal functionality as the former Control Panel FCP1.

Note!

D The general operating instructions are described in the separate GCP Manual FU 0104 It provides short form instructions for an expert with experiences in operating of telecines.

D Additional detailed information is available at the corresponding FCP functions, described in the following chapters

4.1.1 CONTROL AND DISPLAY ELEMENTS GCP Trackball delegation: Power Dialog buttons For future use to panel to machine TK button

Previous Prev

Control Ctrl Trackball

Lock

Acceleration

Help

Digits

Unity

Dialog function buttons Digipots Machine controls

Fig. 401: Graphical Control Panel GCP1

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-1 4.1 Basic Menu Control GCP STE-B1

4.1.2 MENUSTRUCTURE OF GCP1 Main menus Sub menus

Menus Home Overview Setup Remote Options

TK Config Film Deck SDTV HDTV Data Timecode

Film Matching Masking

Color Primary 6–Sector Color Setup

Sharp Contour Aperture (Spirit only)

Sizing Sizing Reproduction Blanking

Audio Audio Levels Audio Config

Special Scream Extern Devices Steady Scan

Memo TK Mems Cue

Monitoring Test Point Setup Diagnosis

1x . . . Login GCP User, Panel and Network Setup 2x . . . Copy

Fig. 402: Menu structure of the Graphical Control Panel GCP1

4-2 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.2 Basic Menu Control FCP

4.2 BASIC MENU CONTROL WITH FUNCTIONAL CONTROL PANEL

1 2 3 4 5

6 7

Fig. 403: Functional Control panel CP1

Overview

1 Menu selection keypad

2 Display

3 Function keys of menu control pad

4 Cursor keys

5 Numeric keypad

6 Digipot adjust dial

7 MFD multifunctional dial

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-3 4.2 Basic Menu Control FCP STE-B1

Main menu selection The user controls and operates the Shadow Telecine via 12 main menus appearing on display 2 . The 12 main menus are selected directly by pressing a menu selection key (”HOME”, ”SIZING”, ”FILM” etc.) on the menu selection keypad 1 .

Within the menus, the function keys 3 , the digipot adjust dial 6 , the cursor keys 4 and the numeric keypad 5 serve to start menu-dependent switching operations to select or change parameters and to enter time values (time code, cue time etc.). Display division

8 9 10

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

11 12

Fig. 404: Home menu

Common features The following applies to all menus: The upper part contains the information area.

8 Menu title section displays the name of the selected main menu

9 User message line

10 Actual time code display Indicates also the presence of an diagnostic message. This diagnostic message is displayed in main menu DIAGNOSIS.

4-4 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.2 Basic Menu Control FCP

The lower part contains the function selection area.

11 Softkey bar Display of the function key assignment

12 Function keys F1 to F12 of menu control pad

Function keys The function keys F1 to F12 in the menu control pad 12 serve to select and switch functions or parameters, to open windows and/or activate submenus.

The assignment of the function keys is shown in the softkey bar 11 on the lower edge of the display. If an assigned function key is pressed, the corresponding softkey is shown inverse (light background, corresponds to a lit key when a function is selected). If the function key is pressed again, the function is deselected.

Open window In order to ensure a high comfort for the user when operating with a great variety of possible selections, additional windows can be shown in nearly all main menus. These windows can be opened with the corresponding function keys. The selected window is superimposed in the main menu display. The changed softkey bar indicates the different assignments of the function keys within this window.

The assignments of the function keys outside the window (thus visible on the main menu level) do not change.

Example By pressing function key F11, window ”Speed Select” is opened in main menu HOME to simplify the speed selection.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 405: Home menu with window ”Focus Adjust”

The window appears in the lower part of the display. The keys F1 to F10 get new assignments. The key F11 keep its assignment.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-5 4.2 Basic Menu Control FCP STE-B1

Close window Each window may be closed in several ways: D By pressing the function key “EXIT” (softkey bar). This is F10 in the example mentioned above. D By pressing the window selection key. This is F11 in the example mentioned above. D By pressing a main menu selection key.

Select submenu In some main menus, the submenus can be selected with the function keys.

Exit submenu Return from a submenu to the main menu is made by pressing function key F12 (EXIT) or the relevant main menu selection key.

Table selection 1. Click the corresponding function key shortly to scroll down the table entry (scroll bar). This does not apply to settings of continuous values, for example level adjustments.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 406: Audio Config menu with window ”Setup Noise Reduction”

2. Hold down the function key (approx. 0.5 seconds) and release it again (key remains lit). Select and/or adjust the parameters with the adjust dial or the cursor keys. The value is entered automatically. If the key is pressed again, it is deactivated and the light will go out.

Note:

If within 20 seconds after the first setting procedure (adjust dial or cursor keys) no other setting is executed, the key goes out automatically to make sure that the values are not changed by mistake.

4-6 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.2 Basic Menu Control FCP

3. Hold the function key and at the same time select or set the parameters with the adjust dial or the cursor keys. Release the function key, the changed value is entered and the key goes out.

Note:

If needed, the operating procedures can be changed in the Setup menu with set PANEL (see section 4.13.5).

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-7 4.2 Basic Menu Control FCP STE-B1

4.2.1 MAIN MENU OVERVIEW FCP

This section will give a short overview of the main menus; for detailed descriptions of the main menus see the following pages. HOME Appears after the Shadow Telecine has been switched on. It serves to monitor and control the basic machine functions. For details see section 4.3. FILM The film menu shows matching adjustments, intensity of film illumination and fundamental film setup settings. For details see section 4.4. SIZING Shows the most important film scanning and film reproduction adjustments. For details see section 4.5. GRADING Serves to set the video parameters. For details see section 4.6. TIME CODE Serves to set the timecode. For details see section 4.7. MULTI CUE Serves to store up to 99 cue points for exact frame search mode and recall them again. For details see section 4.8. AUDIO LEVELS Serves to adjust the analog and digital audio input and output signal levels. For details see section 4.9. AUDIO CONFIG Serves to display and change the audio system configuration. For details see section 4.10. MONITORING Serves to select the test signal and the measuring points for monitor and oscilloscope. For details see section 4.11. USER Serves to set the parameters for picture reproduction with the HIPPI data channel (High Performance Parallel Interface). For details see section 4.12. SETUP Serves to set the machine parameters which are not allocated to any other main menu, for example selection of the remote interface.

Moreover, it permits selecting submenu Setup PANEL which comprises fundamental configurations of the control panel itself. For details see section 4.13. DIAGN Provides error and system messages for machine diagnostic and maintenance. For details see section 4.14.

4-8 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.3 Home Menu FCP

4.3 HOME MENU

1 2 3 4 5 6

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

10 9 8 7

Fig. 407: Home menu

This menu appears automatically after having switched on the Shadow Telecine. It permits the user to handle the most important machine settings and operating modes. The Home menu serves to control the following Shadow Telecine functions: D Audio output level adjustment for the audio channels audio 1 and audio 2 D Focusing and frame line settings D Operational preparations for film deck, video and genlock D Selection of the variable film transport speed (in frames/s) Pressing key ”Home” on the control panel enables to return from any other menu to the main menu Home.

Overview

1 Menu title section; shows the name of the selected menu

2 User message line

3 Display of current time code (TC) Display in hours : minutes : seconds : frames

4 Display of cue time for exact frame search

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-9 4.3 Home Menu FCP STE-B1

5 Display of film supply (not shown in the standby off mode) The remaining film time is displayed as a black bar (and alphanumeric). The entire film time is displayed as a white field and can be read at its right side in minutes (or feet). When starting the film, the black and white fields are congruent and limited to the right by the hatched field.

6 Actual time code display and indication that an internal diagnostic message is present. The diagnostic message is displayed in the main menu. Diagnosis (see section 4.14).

7 Scratch pad for manual entry of values with the numeric keyboard (Fig. 403 on page 4-3 point 5 ). The entered value can be used as follows: D Cue time point transfer Pressing the key ”IN” in the key panel transfers the value into the Cue time display (Fig. 407 point 4 ).

D Cue time point transfer and search mode Pressing the key ”Search” on the Control Panel transfers the value into the Cue time display (Fig. 407 point 4 ) and starts a search run to the value taken over as a cue time point. D Setting time code generator (film timer) Pressing the function key F6 (set FTC) transfers the entered value into the film timer.

8 General information window; provides short information about essential basic setting.

9 Operating display of the film deck; informs about film drive mode (PLAY, SEARCH, STEP), film run direction, film speed, stop status, if no film is threaded (”NO FILM”) and indicates that the Shadow Telecine is operating in the remote mode (”no contr.”).

10 Audio level display; indicates the current audio levels of the two audio channels (CH 1 and CH 2) as well as the current position of the level controls for audio Out 1 and 2 ( ).

Function keys

F 1 Adjust channel CH 1 For adjusting the audio output levels CH 1. Activates function key F3, see section 4.3.1.

F 2 Adjust channel CH 2 For adjusting the audio output levels CH 2. Activates function key F3, see section 4.3.1.

4-10 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.3 Home Menu FCP

F 3 Not assigned. Display ”resol COARS” only active when function key F1 or F2 is operated, see section 4.3.1.

F 4 Set FOCUS Focus adjustment on or off

F 5 Set FRAME opens window, see section 4.3.2.

F 6 Set FTC sets the current film timecode. Pressing the function key transfers the entered value of the scratch pad into the film timer.

F 7 Test PATTN Test signal on or off. The preselection of the test signal (staircase, sawtooth, color bar) is made in the Monitoring menu. Test PATTN ON: test signal Test PATTN OFF: film signal

F 8 Setup FILMD opens submenu, see section 4.13.2.

F 9 Setup VIDEO opens submenu, see section 4.13.3.

F 10 Setup STDRD opens a window in the setup menu, see section 4.13.1. Exit (F12) of the window returns to the Home menu.

F 11 Select SPEED opens window, see section 4.3.4.

F 12 Select SCREAM opens window, see section 4.3.5.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-11 4.3 Home Menu FCP STE-B1

4.3.1 ADJUST CHANNEL CH 1, CH 2

F 3 activated

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 408: Home menu with activated function key F 3

Function key F3 is selected and activated by actuating function key F1 (or F2) in the Home menu (see fig. 408: F 3). Repeated pressing of function key F3 enables to switch over from a coarse setting (COARS) to a fine setting (FINE) of the audio output levels for audio 1 (or audio 2). When switching to FINE, the audio level display is changed over to a more sensitive display. COARS: 0 dB ... –48 dB (see Fig.408) FINE: –6 dB ... –24 dB (see Fig. 409) Adjustment of the two audio channels is made separately with the digipot (adjust dial) on the control panel (Fig. 403 point 6 ). The two filled triangles move on the display bar upwards or downwards to the desired setting value.

Close Press function key F1 (or F2) i.e. deselect CH 1 (and CH 2). function key F 3 After approx. 20 s, deselection is carried out automatically.

Display: –6 dB to –24 dB

Fig. 409: Home menu with a more sensitive audio level display

4-12 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.3 Home Menu FCP

4.3.2 SET FOCUS

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 410: Home menu with window ”Focus Adjust”

Focus field will lit after actuating function key F 4 ”set FOCUS” in main menu ”HOME”. In this rode, the Shadow Telecine is focused optically to the film material used. For optimum focus adjustment it is useful to zoom into image and focus on the grain. For a better detection of the grain, the coring adjustments in the Film and Grading menus should be set to 0% and at least the aperture correction should be set to maximum.

Function keys The following functions can be selected via function keys.

F 6 STORE Active only in the service mode. Stores the current focus setting as a ”unity” value (default value).

F 7 press ADJST After pressing function key F 7, the optical focus is now adjusted with the digipot adjust dial on the control panel (fig. 403 6 ).

The display (over ”press ADJST”) shows the selected focus adjustment in form of a five-digit number. Thus, focus adjustments become reproducible. Close window

F 8 EXIT Closes window ”Focus Adjust”. Alternatively, press function key F12 or again F4.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-13 4.3 Home Menu FCP STE-B1

4.3.3 SET FRAME

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 411: Home menu with window ”Framing Adjust”

Window ”Framing Adjust” is opened by actuating function key F 5 ”set FRAM” in main menu ”HOME.” In this window, the frame line of the film frame is coarsely shifted into the vertical blanking interval and thus made imperceptible.

Function keys The following functions can be selected via function keys.

F 7 STORE Active only in the service mode. Stores the last framing adjustment as a ”unity” value (default value).

F 8 coarse DOWN Softkey assignment only available for 35mm film. After pressing function key F 8, the frame line is shifted by 1/4 of picture height downward.

F 9 coarse UP Softkey assignment only available for 35mm film. After pressing function key F 9, the frame line is shifted by 1/4 of picture height upward.

F 10 adjust FINE After pressing function key F 10, the softkey display changes to ”use pot FINE”. The frame line is adjusted with the digipot adjust dial on the control panel (see fig. 403 6 ). The display (over ”adjust FINE”) shows the selected frame line in form of a five-digit number. Thus, framing adjustments become reproducible. Close window

F 11 EXIT Closes window ”Framing Adjust”.

4-14 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.3 Home Menu FCP

4.3.4 SELECT SPEED

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 412: Home menu with window ”Speed Select”

Window ”Speed Select” is opened by actuating function key F11 ”select SPEED” in main menu ”HOME.” This window serves to adjust the fixed or variable film speed for the Shadow Tele- cine. Fixed film speeds at 625/1250L/50Hz: 6 1/4, 12 1/2, 18 3/4, 25 and 50 frames/s as well as a preselected variable film speed (SAS = Select a Speed) Fixed film speeds at 525/1125L/60Hz: 6, 12, 18, 24, 30 and 48 frames/s as well as a preselected variable film speed (SAS = Select a Speed)

Variable film speeds SAS: Range from 2.000 to 57.000 fps for all standards

Function keys The following functions can be selected via function keys.

F 1 to F 5 Select speed Fixed film speeds, selectable according to TV standard.

F 6 Select speed SAS The Shadow Telecine is changed over to a variable film transport speed. The softkey display (over softkey ”set SAS”) shows the variable film speed adjusted last. The Shadow Telecine will then run at this speed.

F 7 to F 8 Not assigned in this TV standard

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-15 4.3 Home Menu FCP STE-B1

F 9 Set SAS Activation of variable SAS film speed. The SAS value is entered with the numeric keypad of the control panel and stored under function key F6 after having pressed key F9.

The softkey display (over ”set SAS”) shows the selected film speed setting in form of a figure. Thus, variable SAS speeds become reproducible.

Close window

F 10 EXIT Closes window ”Speed Select”.

Alternatively, press function key F12 or again F11.

4.3.5 SELECT SCREAM

Windows “Scream” is opened by actuating function key F12 “SCRM” in main menu “Home” The control parameters of the Grain Reducer SCREAM are grouped into an operational and a setup parameter’s section. Details see in the separate Customer’s Manual SGR 2000 SCREAM Grain Re- ducer: FU 0107, 0 126 630 700

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 413: Home menu with window ”SCREAM”

4-16 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.4 Film Menu FCP

4.4 FILM MENU

1 2 3 4 5 6

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 413: Film menu

This menu appears after pressing the menu selection key ”FILM” on the control panel. It shows the user the matching settings in the black and white areas, the intensity of film illumination, the video level and the film setup settings (film type and video basic gain).

Overview

1 Menu title section; shows the name of the selected menu

2 Display of RGB matching settings in the black areas

3 Display of RGB matching settings in the white areas

4 Display of intensity of film illumination

5 Display of film video level

6 General information window; gives information about the film setup settings (see section 4.4.2).

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-17 4.4 Film Menu FCP STE-B1

Function keys

F 1 to F 6 Matching black or matching gain R, G, B serves for setting the RGB black level or RGB white level matching. Adjustment is made by pressing the relevant function key and turning the adjust dial on the control panel. When exiting the menu, the last matching setting is stored.

F 7 Illumination ADJUS serves for setting the intensity of film illumination. Adjustment is made by pressing function key F7 and turning the adjust dial on the control panel. When exiting the selection, the last illumination intensity value is stored.

F 8 Illumination SHOT serves during PLAY for setting the intensity of film illumination once to 100 % video level.

F 9 set COEFF serves the color adaption for different film types via masking adjustment or fixed masking coefficients selection. opens submenu, see section 4.4.1.

F 11 unity ALL adjusts standard values for the film menu.

F 12 film SETUP opens window “Film Setup”, see section 4.4.2.

4-18 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.4 Film Menu FCP

4.4.1 SET FILM MASKING

1 2 3 4 5

comm_1 TCP5285 comm_2 TCPLIMX comm_3 spec_3 comm_4 spec_4 comm_5 spec_5 comm_6 spec_6 comm_7 spec_7 comm_8 spec_8

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 414: Submenu ”film masking”

The submenu ”Film Masking” appears after pressing key F9 ”set COEFF” in the main menu Film.

This submenu serves the color adaption to the actually used film. Adaption is made optionally by selection of fixed (F3, F4) or variable (F5) masking coefficients. Print, intermediate, primetime and color films are adaptable (positive and negative films, see section 4.4.2).

Overview

1 Submenu title section; displays the name of the selected submenu

2 Display of the actual masking adjustment (from F2 to F4).

3 - 5 Represents the following matrix equation:

345

R out C1 C2 C3 R in G out = C4 C5 C6 G in B out C7 C8 C9 B in

4 Display of the actual masking coefficients C1 to C9

Fixed masking coefficients, see next paragraph.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-19 4.4 Film Menu FCP STE-B1

Fixed masking - coefficients, 1 - 5 for TAF (Telecine Analysis Film) optimized (status 3/96):

Item Matrix Name Masking Coefficient Kodak Film Type

1 TCNEXR1 Color Negative TAF log. masking 5279

R’ = 0.90 R + 0.05 G + 0.05 B G’ = 0.00 R 1.05 G – 0.05 B B’ = 0.00 R 0.05 G + 0.95 B

2 TPT5600 Primetime Negative TAF log. masking 5600

R’ = 1.14 R – 0.13 G – 0.01 B G’ = 0.00 R 1.04 G – 0.04 B B’ = 0.04 R + 0.16 G + 0.80 B

3 TIM5244 Intermediate Positive TAF log. masking 5244

R’ = 0.94 R + 0.05 G + 0.01 B G’ = 0.05 R + 1.09 G – 0.14 B B’ = 0.02 R + 0.04 G + 0.94 B 4 TCP5285 Print Low Contrast Positive TAF log. masking 5285

R’ = 1.00 R – 0.06 G + 0.06 B G’ = – 0.05 R + 1.11 G – 0.06 B B’ = 0.00 R – 0.08 G + 1.08 B 5 TCPLIMX Print Low Contrast Positive TAF linear matrix 5285

R’ = 0.98 R – 0.03 G + 0.05 B G’ = – 0.05 R + 1.10 G – 0.05 B B’ = 0.00 R – 0.05 G + 1.05 B 6 KIM5244 Intermediate Positive Normal log. masking 5244

(Not TAF, but film scenes optimized) R’ = 1.05 R – 0.05 G 0.00 B G’ = – 0.05 R + 1.10 G – 0.05 B B’ = 0.02 R + 0.04 G + 0.94 B

4-20 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.4 Film Menu FCP

Function keys

F 2 switch OFF Masking switched off.

F 3 select COMM Selection of different basic sets.

F 4 select SPEC(IA)L Selection of different film-dependent masking sets in the format: XYYZZZZ (X = manufacturer, Y = film type, Z = film identification) e.g.: KCN5247 = Kodak Color Negative 5247

XYY K = Kodak CP = Color Print G = Agfa CN = Color Negative F = Fuji IM = Intermediate T = Test PT = Primetime

selectable: TCNEXR1, TPT5600, TIM5244, TCP5285, TCPLIMX, KIM5244

F 5 masking USER switches over to user-defined masking (adjustments cannot be stored).

F 6 select ROW Selects R, G or B row. Adjustment is made by pressing function key F6 and turning the adjust dial or pressing the cursor keys on the control panel.

F 7 to F 9 select R, G, B select the column of the R, G or B masking coefficients. Adjustment is made by pressing the relevant function key and turning the adjust dial on the control panel. When exiting the menu, the last matching setting is stored.

F 10 mode LIN Mainly used when correcting positive films (projection-related correction).

F 11 mode LOG Mainly used when correcting negative films (scene-related correction).

Close window

F 12 EXIT Closes submenu ”Film Masking”.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-21 4.4 Film Menu FCP STE-B1

4.4.2 FILM SETUP

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 415: Window ”film setup”

Window ”Film Setup” is opened by pressing key F12 ”SETUP” in main menu ”FILM.” This window serves to set the configurations for film type and analog basic gain. The individual parameters are selected with the adjust dial or the cursor keys on the control panel. Depending on the assignment, the function keys F1 to F8 are used to change the switching states. Pressing function key F12 (EXIT) exits the submenu and returns to main menu FILM.

Overview The meanings and the selection possibilities of the individual parameters are explained below.

”Film type” defines film type used. Possible selections: print POS / NEG intermediate POS / NEG primetime POS / NEG color POS / NEG

4-22 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.4 Film Menu FCP

F1 ”print POS” used with print films, POS: negative inversion OFF F2 ”print NEG” used with print films, NEG: negative inversion ON F3 ”intermediate POS” used with intermediate films, POS: neg. inversion OFF F4 ”intermediate NEG” used with intermediate films, NEG: neg. inversion ON F5 ”primetime POS” used with primetime films, POS: neg. inversion OFF F6 ”primetime NEG” used with primetime films, NEG: negative inversion ON F7 ”color POS” used with color films, POS: negative inversion OFF F8 ”color NEG” used with color films, NEG: negative inversion ON

Note! F3-F8 film types with orange mask are optically compensated. Intermediate, primetime and color (POS or NEG) film types have different “orange mask compensa- tions”. Print The “print POS” selection creates an illumination spectral balance that, in conjunc- POS or NEG tion with electronic masking or matrixing, will allow color reproduction of color print films approximating that achieved with optical projection. The “print NEG” selection creates an illumination spectral balance that allows scans of unmasked or b/w negative films.

Intermediate The “intermediate POS or NEG” selection creates an illumination color spectral bal- POS or NEG ance with sensitivity peaks that closely match the film dye density peaks of East- man EXR Color Intermediate Film 5244. This mode of illumination also compensates for the red, green and blue minimum densities (D-min) caused by colored masking colored coupler found in the Eastman EXR Color Intermediate Film 5244 stock. Primetime The “primetime NEG” selection creates an illumination color spectral balance that POS or NEG is optimized for the characteristics of low-contrast Eastman Primetime negative film. The “primetime POS” selection creates an illumination color spectral balance to scan positive films with an orange mask close to prime time NEG films.

Color The “color NEG” selection creates an illumination color spectral balance with sensi- POS or NEG tivity peaks that closely match typical camera negative film dye density peaks. It is recommended that for using Eastman Color Intermediate II Film 5243 in POS or NEG.

”ANLG GAIN” defines the (analog) basic gain of the video amplifier. Possible selections: 0 dB / 6 dB F1 ”0 dB ” simple basic gain x 1 F2 ”6 dB ” double basic gain x 2

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-23 4.4 Film Menu FCP STE-B1

4-24 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.5 Sizing Menu FCP

4.5 SIZING MENU

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 416: Sizing menu

This menu appears after pressing menu selection key ”SIZING” on the control panel. The menu shows the user the most important film scanning and film reproduction settings for sizing. The sizing menu shown above, applies to 35mm/4perf films. For 16mm films and negative films, the display shows 16mm symbols or inverted symbols. The sizing menu serves to control the following settings: - Repro settings - Rotation setting - Display of the repro data - Repro area marking - Adjustment of the film blanking - Resetting to standard values - Sizing setup settings

Overview

1 Menu title section; displays the name of the selected menu

2 Display of the repro adjustments H/V size, position and zoom

3 Maximum film frame scanning area (stored area)

4 Selected film scanning format (scanning area)

5 Reproduction area of the film frame

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-25 4.5 Sizing Menu FCP STE-B1

6 Information section; gives short information about additional sizing setup settings (see section 4.5.3).

7 Current time code display; in addition, the display shows the presence of an internal diagnostic message. The diagnostic message is displayed in the main menu Diagnosis (see section 4.14).

Function keys

F 1 to F 3 Reproduction SIZE, POS and ZOOM Adjustment of H and V size, position and zoom of the reproduction format. Horizontal adjustment is made with the MFD multifunction dial, vertical adjustment with the adjust dial on the control panel after pressing the corresponding function key. When exiting the selection, the last repro adjustment is stored.

F 4 Scan EFFECT Changes the angle of rhombic distortion of the film frames horizontal or vertical in the range of $30o. The horizontal or vertical effect preselection is made in the Sizing Setup window with function key F12, parameter “scan effects”. Adjustment is made after pressing the function key with the MFD (Multi Function Dial) on the control panel. When exiting the selection, the last rhombic distortion adjustment is stored.

F 5 Adjust ROTAT (option) with rotating angle display, used for rotating the film frame (adjusting range: "1800). Adjustment is made after pressing the function key with the adjust dial on the control panel. When exiting the selection, the last rotation adjustment is stored. Select various rotation speed in menu “Setup Panel 4.13.5”

F 6 Repro DATA opens window, see section 4.5.1

F 7 Area MARK marks the repro range with marker lines. Horizontal adjustment is made with the MFD multifunction dial, vertical adjustment with the adjust dial on the control panel.

F 8 Adjust BLANK opens submenu, see section 4.5.2

F 9 Unity VAR resets all variable sizing adjustments (SIZE, POS and ZOOM) to standard values.

F 12 SETUP Opens window, see section 4.5.3

4-26 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.5 Sizing Menu FCP

4.5.1 REPRO DATA

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 417: Window ”Reproduction data”

Window ”Reproduction data” is opened by pressing function key F6 ”repro DATA” in main menu ”SIZING”. The window shows the user the most important sizing settings of the Shadow Tele- cine (film format, scanned/reproduced size and position).

Close window

F 5 EXIT Closes window ”Reproduction data”.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-27 4.5 Sizing Menu FCP STE-B1

4.5.2 ADJUST BLANK

1 2 3

720 x 540 359 x 269 0

7711

539

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 418: Submenu ”Blanking”

The submenu is opened by pressing function key F8 ”adjust BLANK” in main menu ”SIZING”. The user adjusts in this submenu the film and TV blanking or resets the blanking to standard values.

Overview

1 Display of the adjustments for film and TV blanking

2 Display of the actual blanking in the active film frame

3 Size and position of the absolute TV blanking in pixels and lines

Function keys

F 1 to F 2 film-blanking SIZE and POS serves for adjusting the horizontal or vertical size/position of the film blanking. The film blanking determines the frame section which is read in into the frame store. Horizontal adjustments are made with the MFD multifunction dial, vertical adjustments with the adjust dial on the control panel after pressing the corresponding function key. When exiting the selection, the last film blanking adjustment is stored.

F 3 to F 4 TV-blanking SIZE and POS serves for adjusting the horizontal or vertical size/position of the TV blanking. The TV blanking determines the frame section which is read out of the frame store. Operation and storage as described under F1, F2.

4-28 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.5 Sizing Menu FCP

Display ”effective blanking type”: shows the blanking type, which effects the actual position and size of the reproduced film frame. scan: optical block determines the blanking film: film blanking determines the blanking tv: TV blanking determines the blanking monit.: video standard determines the blanking

F 6 unity BLANK all blanking adjustments are reset to standard values.

Close window

F 12 EXIT closes submenu ”Blanking”.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-29 4.5 Sizing Menu FCP STE-B1

4.5.3 SIZING SETUP

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 419: Window ”Sizing Setup”

This Window is opened by pressing function key F12 ”SETUP” in main menu ”SIZ- ING”. This window serves to set additional sizing adjustments. When opening the window first, the lit softkey (F1) corresponds to the standard setting (later to the last selection).

Overview The meanings and the selection possibilities of the individual parameters are explained below. Factory adjustments are bold printed.

4.5.3.1 Sizing setup“zoom mode” Serves to change the zoom from nonlinear to linear mode

Selection:

F 1 ”NONLI(NEAR)” standard Shadow sizing: linear programmed dissolves of ZOOM and PAN are performed nonlinear

F 2 ”LINEA(R)” new enhanced Shadow sizing: linear programmed dissolves of ZOOM and PAN are performed linear

4-30 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.5 Sizing Menu FCP

4.5.3.2 Sizing setup ”auto unity”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 420: Sizing Setup

The selection ”fixed aspect” or ”fixed repro” resets all sizing adjustments to standard values. Selection: F 1 ”OFF ” no reset to standard values

F 2 ”ON” switch over to standard values

4.5.3.3 Sizing setup ”ACA-emul”

Enables to operate ACA films with super objectives (by adjusting the blanking). With comopt sound films, we recommend to change the appropriate film gate additionally (option). The Film gate covers the comopt sound track with an iris frame. Selection: F 1 ”OFF” ACA emulation OFF

F 2 ”ON” ACA emulation ON

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-31 4.5 Sizing Menu FCP STE-B1

4.5.3.4 Sizing setup ”Cinemascope”

Sizing format enables cinemascope reproduction. Selection: F 1 ”OFF” cinemascope OFF

F 2 ”ON” cinemascope ON

4.5.3.5 Sizing setup ”H-flip”

Horizontal film frame flipping. Selection: F 1 ”OFF” no horizontal film frame flipping

F 2 ”ON” film frame is horizontally flipped

4.5.3.6 Sizing setup ”V-flip” Vertical film frame flipping. Selection: ”OFF” no vertical film frame flipping

”ON” film frame is vertically flipped

4-32 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.5 Sizing Menu FCP

4.5.3.7 Sizing setup ”fixed aspect”

Diverse fixed film aspect sizes selectable (values only for ”fixed repro” OFF).

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 421: Sizing Setup Selection: F 1 ”CA/AC” full aperture film scanning or ”FA” (CA: camera aperture; AC: ACA emulation; FA: full aperture)

F 2 ”PROJ” rojection window reproduction

F 3 ”ISO” reproduction in conformity with ISO 2907

F 4 ”2.35” for films with a picture aspect ratio of 1 : 2.35

F 5 ”2.20” for films with a picture aspect ratio of 1 : 2.35

F 6 ”1.85” for films with a picture aspect ratio of 1 : 1.85

F 7 ”1.75” for films with a picture aspect ratio of 1 : 1.75

F 8 ”1.66” for films with a picture aspect ratio of 1 : 1.66

F 9 ”EXIT” closes window, returns the user to the sizing menu Hint: Invalid ”fixed aspect” formats are displayed on the output monitor as a small horizontal picture window

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-33 4.5 Sizing Menu FCP STE-B1

4.5.3.8 Sizing setup ”fixed repro”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 422: Sizing Setup

Following fixed reproduction formats are selectable. Selection: F 1 ”OFF” full aspect format visible on the monitor

F 2 ”4:3” output picture is reproduced with an aspect ratio of 1 : 1.33 (4:3 monitor)

F 3 ”16:9” output picture is reproduced with an aspect ratio of 1 : 1.78 (16:9 monitor) F 4 ”DATA” output picture is reproduced with an aspect ratio of 1 : 1.85 (format for cinemascope)

4-34 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.5 Sizing Menu FCP

4.5.3.9 Sizing setup ”SDTV-ratio”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 423: Sizing setup

Picture aspect ratio for the TV output picture. Selection: F 1 ”4 : 3” 4:3 output picture

F 2 ”16 : 9” 16:9 output picture

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-35 4.5 Sizing Menu FCP STE-B1

4.5.3.10 Sizing setup ”16mm mode”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 424: Sizing setup

Horizontal center correction for 16mm films. Selection: F 1 ”DIN” horizontal center correction in conformity with DIN 1602, part 7 and ISO DIS 5768 standard

F 2 ”ISO” horizontal center correction in conformity with ISO 5768 (1981)

4-36 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.5 Sizing Menu FCP

4.5.3.11 Sizing setup ”rhombic effects”

Check rhombic effect by playing a checker board film loop.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 425: Window “Sizing setup”

This Window is opened by pressing function key F12 ”SETUP” in main menu ”SIZING”. Choose parameter “scan effects” from the table Sizing Setup. Selection: F 1 ”OFF” rhombic distortion disabled

F 2 ”RHO-H” setup rhombic distortion horizontal

F 3 ”RHO-V” setup rhombic distortion vertical

Change the angle of rhombic distortion in the range of 30_ with the Multi Func- tional Dial.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-37 4.5 Sizing Menu FCP STE-B1

4.5.3.12 Sizing setup ”sizing base”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 426: Sizing setup

Switches over the sizing base Selection: F 1 ”ANA(LOG) O(UT)” sizing base effects the analog output

F 2 ”DIG(ITAL) O(UT)” sizing base effects the digital output

4-38 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.5 Sizing Menu FCP

4.5.4 FIXED FILM FORMATS

Note!

Tolerances for all fixed film formats, caused by the scanner unit, the testfilm and reading errors may sum up to $0.2 mm. Exceptions: At format values marked with *, the tolerances may sum up to $0.5 mm, with option “Rotation”. At format values marked with z, the tolerances may sum up to $0.5 mm, without option “Rotation”.

4.5.4.1 35 mm, 4 Perf, Full Aperture LGA and Gate

sizing setup scanned area aspect repro scan width scan center height line remark [mm] [mm] [mm] CA / AC off 24,45 18,80 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA max. scanning area CA / AC 1,33 24,45 18,34z 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA max. scanning width => 4:3 CA / AC 1,78 24,45 13,75 17,48 FSB FA 35 LGA max. scanning width => 16:9 CA / AC 1,85 24,45 13,22 17,48 FSB FA 35 LGA max. scanning width => 1,85:1 PROJ off 23,50 17,50 17,48 DIN 15502–6 projection area PROJ 1,33 23,50 17,63z 17,48 EBU R86–1997 (DIN 15502–6 width => 4:3) PROJ 1,78 23,50 13,22 17,48 EBU R86–1997 (DIN 1550–6 width => 16:9) PROJ 1,85 23,50 12,70 17,48 DIN 15502–6 width => 1,85:1 2,35 off 23,50 10,00 17,48 ARRI–1985 projection area 2,35:1 2,35 1,33 13,33 10,00 17,48 2,35:1 => 4:3 PanScan 2,35 1,78 17,78 10,00 17,48 2,35:1 => 16:9 PanScan 2,35 1,85 18,50 10,00 17,48 2,35:1 => 1,85:1 PanScan 2,20 off 23,50 10,68 17,48 ARRI–1985 projection area 2,20:1 2,20 1,33 14,24 10,68 17,48 2,20:1 => 4:3 PanScan 2,20 1,78 18,99 10,68 17,48 2,20:1 => 16:9 PanScan 2,20 1,85 19,76 10,68 17,48 2,20:1 => 1,85:1 PanScan 1,85 off 23,50 12,70 17,48 ARRI–1985 projection area 1,85:1 1,85 1,33 16,93 12,70 17,48 1,85:1 => 4:3 PanScan 1,85 1,78 22,58 12,70 17,48 1,85:1 => 16:9 PanScan 1,85 1,85 23,50 12,70 17,48 ARRI–1985 projection area 1,85:1

Table 401

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-39 4.5 Sizing Menu FCP STE-B1

4.5.4.2 35mm, 4 Perf, Full Aperture LGA, ACA Gate

sizing setup scanning area aspect repro scan scan center width height line remark [mm] [mm] [mm] CA / AC off 21,25 18,80 18,75 FSB 35 LGA = FSB FA35 LGA + FSB 35 GB max. scanning area CA / AC 1,33 21,25 16,00 18,75 ISO 2906 height => 4:3 CA / AC 1,78 21,25 11,95 18,75 FSB 35 LGA max. scanning width => 16:9 CA / AC 1,85 21,25 11,49 18,75 FSB 35 LGA max. scanning width => 1,85:1 ISO off 20,12 15,09 18,75 ISO 1223, DIN 15502–2, EBU R86–1997, SMPTE 96M ISO 1,33 20,12 15,09 18,75 ISO 1223, DIN 15502–2, EBU R86–1997, SMPTE 96M ISO 1,78 20,12 11,32 18,75 ISO 1223 width => 16:9 ISO 1,85 20,12 10,88 18,75 ISO 1223 width => 1,85:1 1,85 off 21,11 11,33 18,75 ISO 2907 projection area 1,85:1 1,85 1,33 15,11 11,33 18,75 ISO 2907 projection height 1,85:1 => 4:3 PanScan 1,85 1,78 20,14 11,33 18,75 ISO 2907 projection height 1,85:1 => 16:9 Pan- Scan 1,85 1,85 20,96 11,33 18,75 ISO 2907 projection height 1,85:1 => 1,85:1 Pan- Scan 1,75 off 21,11 11,96 18,75 ISO 2907 projection area 1,75:1 1,75 1,33 15,95 11,96 18,75 ISO 2907 projection height 1,75:1 => 4:3 PanScan 1,75 1,78 21,11 11,87 18,75 ISO 2907 projection width 1,75:1 => 16:9 1,75 1,85 21,11 11,41 18,75 ISO 2907 projection width 1,75:1 => 1,85:1 1,66 off 21,11 12,62 18,75 ISO 2907 projection area 1,66:1 1,66 1,33 16,83 12,62 18,75 ISO 2907 projection height 1,66:1 => 4:3 PanScan 1,66 1,78 21,11 11,87 18,75 ISO 2907 projection width 1,66:1 => 16:9 1,66 1,85 21,11 11,41 18,75 ISO 2907 projection width 1,66:1 => 1,85:1

Table 402

4-40 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.5 Sizing Menu FCP

4.5.4.3 35mm, 4 Perf, Full Aperture LGA and Gate, Anamorphic

sizing setup scanning area aspect repro scan scan center width height line remark [mm] [mm] [mm] CA / AC off 24,45 18,80 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA max. scanning area CA / AC 1,33 12,67 18,80 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA max. scanning height => 4:3 Pan- Scan CA / AC 1,78 16,89 18,80 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA max. scanning height => 16:9 PanScan CA / AC 1,85 17,57 18,80 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA max. scanning height => 1,85:1 PanScan PROJ off 23,80 18,34 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA Cinemascope projection area (Shadow Telecine) PROJ 1,33 12,23 18,34z 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA Cinemascope => 4:3 PanScan PROJ 1,78 16,30 18,34z 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA Cinemascope => 16:9 PanScan PROJ 1,85 16,96 18,34 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA Cinemascope => 1,85:1 PanScan

Table 403

4.5.4.4 35mm, 4 Perf, Full Aperture LGA, ACA Gate, Anamorphic

sizing setup scanning area aspect repro scan scan center width height line remark [mm] [mm] [mm] CA / AC off 21,25 18,80 18,75 FSB 35 LGA = FSB FA35 LGA + FSB 35 GB max. scanning area CA / AC 1,33 12,55 18,80 18,75 FSB 35 LGA max. scanning height => 4:3 PanScan CA / AC 1,78 16,73 18,80 18,75 FSB 35 LGA max. scanning height => 16:9 Pan- Scan CA / AC 1,85 17,41 18,80 18,75 FSB 35 LGA max. scanning height => 1,85:1 Pan- Scan

2,35 off 21,25 18,21 18,75 derived from ISO 2907 projection area anamorphic 2,35 1,33 12,14 18,21z 18,75 ISO 2907 projection height anamorphic => 4:3 Pan- Scan 2,35 1,78 16,19 18,21 18,75 ISO 2907 projection height anamorphic => 16:9 PanScan 2,35 1,85 16,84 18,21 18,75 ISO 2907 projection height anamorphic => 1,85:1 PanScan 2,20 off 20,03 18,21 18,75 ISO 2907 projection height anamorphic => 2,20:1 PanScan 1,85 off 16,84 18,21 18,75 ISO 2907 projection height anamorphic => 1,85:1 PanScan

Table 404

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-41 4.5 Sizing Menu FCP STE-B1

4.5.4.5 35mm, 3 Perf, Full Aperture LGA and Gate

sizing setup scanning area aspect repro scan scan center width height line remark [mm] [mm] [mm] CA / AC off 24,45 14,05 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA max. scanning area CA / AC 1,33 18,73*z 14,05 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA max. scanning height => 4:3 Pan- Scan CA / AC 1,78 24,45 13,78 17,48 FSB FA 35 LGA max. scanning width => 16:9 CA / AC 1,85 24,45 13,24 17,48 FSB FA 35 LGA max. scanning width => 1,85:1 PROJ off 23,50 13,22 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA 3 Perf projection area (Shadow Telecine) PROJ 1,33 17,63 13,22 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA 3 Perf proj.height (Shadow Tele- cine) => 4:3 PanScan PROJ 1,78 23,50 13,22 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA 3 Perf projection width (Shadow Telecine ) => 16:9 PROJ 1,85 23,50 12,70 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA 3 Perf projection width (Shadow Telecine) => 1,85:1

Table 405

4.5.4.6 35mm, 3 Perf, Full Aperture LGA, ACA Gate

sizing setup scanning area aspect repro scan scan center width height line remark [mm] [mm] [mm] CA / AC off 21,25 14,05 18,75 FSB 35 LGA = FSB FA35 LGA + FSB 35 GB max. scanning area CA / AC 1,33 18,73*z 14,05 18,75 FSB 35 LGA max. scanning height => 4:3 PanScan CA / AC 1,78 21,25 11,95 18,75 FSB 35 LGA max. scanning width => 16:9 CA / AC 1,85 21,25 11,49 18,75 FSB 35 LGA max. scanning width => 1,85:1 PROJ off 20,96 12,63 18,75 Panavision 1987 projection area 1,66:1 PROJ 1,33 16,84 12,63 18,75 Panavision 1987 projection height 1,66:1 => 4:3 PanScan PROJ 1,78 20,96 11,79 18,75 Panavision 1987 projection width 1,66:1 => 16:9 PROJ 1,85 20,96 11,33 18,75 Panavision 1987 projection width 1,66:1 => 1,85:1 1,85 off 20,96 11,33 18,75 Panavision 1987 projection area 1,85:1 1,85 1,33 15,11 11,33z 18,75 Panavision 1987 projection width 1,85:1 => 4:3 PanScan 1,85 1,78 20,14 11,33 18,75 Panavision 1987 projection width 1,85:1 => 16:9 PanScan 1,85 1,85 20,96 11,33 18,75 Panavision 1987 projection area 1,85:1

Table 406

4-42 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.5 Sizing Menu FCP

4.5.4.7 35mm, 2 Perf, Full Aperture LGA and Gate

sizing setup scanning area aspect repro scan width scan height center line remark [mm] [mm] [mm] CA / AC off 24,45z 9,32 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA max. scanning area CA / AC 1,33 12,43*z 9,32 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA max. scanning height => 4:3 PanScan CA / AC 1,78 16,57*z 9,32 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA max. scanning height => 16:9 PanScan CA / AC 1,85 17,24*z 9,32 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA max. scanning height => 1,85:1 PanScan

Table 407

4.5.4.8 35mm, 2 Perf, Full Aperture LGA, ACA Gate

sizing setup scanning area aspect repro scan scan center width height line remark [mm] [mm] [mm] CA / AC off 21,25 9,32 18,75 FSB FA35 LGA + FSB 35 GB max. scanning area CA / AC 1,33 12,43*z 9,32 18,75 FSB 35 LGA max. scanning height => 4:3 PanScan CA / AC 1,78 16,57*z 9,32 18,75 FSB 35 LGA max. scanning height => 16:9 Pan- Scan CA / AC 1,85 17,24*z 9,32 18,75 FSB 35 LGA max. scanning height => 1,85:1 Pan- Scan PROJ off 20,96 8,99 18,75 SMPTE 257 stereoscopic, symmetrical PROJ 1,33 11,99z 8,99 18,75 SMPTE 257, symmetrical height => 4:3 PanScan PROJ 1,78 15,98 8,99 18,75 SMPTE 257, symmetrical height => 16:9 PanScan PROJ 1,85 16,63 8,99 18,75 SMPTE 257, symmetrical height => 1,85:1 Pan- Scan

Table 408

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-43 4.5 Sizing Menu FCP STE-B1

4.5.4.9 16mm Scanning Formats, Super 16mm LGA and Gate

sizing setup scanning area aspect repro scan scan center center width height line line [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] remark DIN ISO CA / AC off 12,48 ** 7,52 9 9,15 FSB S16 LGA max. scanning area CA / AC 1,33 10,03 7,52 9 9,15 FSB S16 LGA max. scanning height => 4:3 PanScan CA / AC 1,78 12,48 7,02 9 9,15 FSB S16 LGA max. scanning width => 16:9 CA / AC 1,85 12,48 6,75 9 9,15 FSB S16 LGA max. scanning width => 1,85:1 PROJ off 11,64 7,01 9 9,15 ISO 1223 16mm height => 1,66:1 projection area Shadow Telecine PROJ 1,33 9,35 7,01 9 9,15 1,66:1 => ISO 1223 4:3 PanScan PROJ 1,78 11,64 6,55 9 9,15 1,66:1 => 16:9 PROJ 1,85 11,64 6,29 9 9,15 1,66:1 => 1,85:1 1,85 off 11,64 6,29 9 9,15 1,66:1 projection width Shadow Telecine => 1,85:1 1,85 1,33 8,39 6,29 9 9,15 1,85:1 => 4:3 PanScan 1,85 1,78 11,19 6,29 9 9,15 1,85:1 => 16:9 PanScan 1,85 1,85 11,64 6,29 9 9,15 1,66:1 projection width Shadow Telecine => 1,85:1 1,66 off 11,64 7,01 9 9,15 ISO 1223 16mm height => 1,66:1 projection area Shadow Telecine 1,66 1,33 9,35 7,01 9 9,15 1,66:1 => ISO 1223 4:3 PanScan 1,66 1,78 11,64 6,55 9 9,15 1,66:1 => 16:9 1,66 1,85 11,64 6,29 9 9,15 1,66:1 => 1,85:1

Table 409

** = Scan width will be reduced if center position “16mm mode = ISO” (menu Sizing - F12) is selected.

4-44 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.5 Sizing Menu FCP

4.5.4.10 16mm, Super 16mm LGA, 16mm Gate

sizing setup scanning area aspect repro scan scan center width height line remark [mm] [mm] [mm] CA / AC off 9,75 7,52 7,98 FSB S16 LGA + FSB 16 GB max. scanning area CA / AC 1,33 9,75 7,31 7,98 FSB S16 LGA + FSB 16 GB max. scanning width => 4:3 CA / AC 1,78 9,75 5,48 7,98 FSB S16 LGA + FSB 16 GB max. scanning width => 16:9 CA / AC 1,85 9,75 5,27 7,98 FSB S16 LGA + FSB 16 GB max. scanning width => 1,85:1 PROJ off 9,65 7,26 7,98 EBU R86–1997 (ISO 359–1977, ANSI/SMPTE 233–1987 proj.area) PROJ 1,33 9,65 7,24 7,98 EBU R86–1997 (ISO 359–1977 width => 4:3) PROJ 1,78 9,65 5,43 7,98 ISO 359–1977 width => 16:9 PROJ 1,85 9,65 5,22 7,98 ISO 359–1977 width => 1,85:1 ISO off 9,35 7,01 7,98 ISO 1223, DIN 15502–2, EBU R86–1997, SMPTE 96M ISO 1,33 9,35 7,01 7,98 ISO 1223, DIN 15502–2, EBU R86–1997, SMPTE 96M ISO 1,78 9,35 5,26 7,98 ISO 1223 scanning width => 16:9 ISO 1,85 9,35 5,05 7,98 ISO 1223 scanning width => 1,85:1 1,85 off 9,65 5,22 7,98 ISO 359–1977, ANSI/SMPTE 233–1987 projection width => 1,85:1 1,85 1,33 6,96 5,22 7,98 1,85:1 => 4:3 PanScan 1,85 1,78 9,27 5,22 7,98 1,85:1 => 16:9 PanScan 1,85 1,85 9,65 5,22 7,98 1,85:1 1,75 off 9,65 5,51 7,98 ISO 359–1977, ANSI/SMPTE 233–1987 projection width => 1,75:1 1,75 1,33 7,35 5,51 7,98 1,75:1 => 4:3 PanScan 1,75 1,78 9,65 5,43 7,98 1,75:1 => 16:9 1,75 1,85 9,65 5,22 7,98 1,75:1 => 1,85:1 1,66 off 9,65 5,81 7,98 ISO 359–1977, ANSI/SMPTE 233–1987 projection width => 1,66:1 1,66 1,33 7,75 5,81 7,98 1,66:1 => 4:3 PanScan 1,66 1,78 9,65 5,43 7,98 1,66:1 => 16:9 1,66 1,85 9,65 5,22 7,98 1,66:1 => 1,85:1

Table 410

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-45 4.5 Sizing Menu FCP STE-B1

4.5.4.11 16mm, Super LGA and Gate, Anamorphic

Table 411

** = Scan width will be reduced if center position “16mm mode = ISO” (menu Sizing - F12) is selected.

4.5.4.12 16mm, Super 16mm LGA, 16mm Gate, Anamorphic

sizing setup scanning area aspect repro scan scan center width height line [mm] [mm] [mm] remark CA / AC off 9,75 7,52 7,98 FSB S16 LGA + FSB 16 GB max. scanning area CA / AC 1,33 5,01 7,52 7,98 FSB S16 LGA + FSB 16 GB max. scanning width => 4:3 CA / AC 1,78 6,68 7,52 7,98 FSB S16 LGA + FSB 16 GB max. scanning width => 16:9 CA / AC 1,85 6,95 7,52 7,98 FSB S16 LGA + FSB 16 GB max. scanning width => 1,85:1 2,35 CA off 8,82 7,47 7,98 SMPTE 65–1991: 2,35:1 ACA 35mm => 16mm cont.dupli. NEG area 2,35 CA 1,33 4,98 7,47 7,98 2,35:1 CA scanning height => 4:3 PanScan 2,35 CA 1,78 6,64 7,47 7,98 2,35:1 CA scanning height => 16:9 PanScan 2,35 CA 1,85 6,91 7,47 7,98 2,35:1 CA scanning height => 1,85:1 PanScan 2,35 off 8,59 7,31 7,98 Shadow Telecine projection area 2,35:1 2,35 1,33 4,88 7,31 7,98 2,35:1 => 4:3 PanScan 2,35 1,78 6,50 7,31 7,98 2,35:1 => 16:9 PanScan 2,35 1,85 6,77 7,31 7,98 2,35:1 => 1,85:1 PanScan

Table 412

4-46 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.6 Grading Menu FCP

4.6 GRADING MENU

1 2 3 4

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 427: Grading menu

The ”Grading” menu is selected by pressing the menu selection key ”GRADING” on the control panel. The Grading menu includes the following setting possibilities:

D Setting the black, white and gamma values (optionally RGB locked via ”MASTR” or individually via ”RGB”)

D Settings for contour, coring and chrominance

D Setup 6-Sector Color Correction

D Setup settings

Overview

1 Color circle display for the individual, separate, RGB black level setting (black RGB). The circle displays for gamma and white are set up similarly.

2 Horizontal bar graph for the locked RGB black level adjustment (black MASTR). The setting displays for gamma MASTR and white MASTR are similar.

3 Setting displays for contour, coring and chrominance

CONTU = H- and V contour correction (subjective improvement of the picture sharpness) CORNG = Prevents a sharp figure of noise details CHROM = Color saturation adjustment

4 General information window; gives short information about the SETUP adjustments which can be selected with function key F12 in the Grading menu.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-47 4.6 Grading Menu FCP STE-B1

Function keys The following adjustments can be selected via function keys.

F 1 black RGB For adjusting the individual RGB black levels. A point in the RGB color circle indicates the current RGB adjustment. A changed RGB black level adjustment is shown by a changed position of the point in the RGB color circle. After pressing function key F1, the RGB adjustment can be made for the magnitude with the adjust dial and for the phase with the MFD multifunctional dial.

F 2 black MASTR Locked RGB black level adjustment (without changing the current RGB adjustment).

F 3 gamma RGB Same functions as function key F1, but applies to the individual RGB gamma values.

F 4 gamma MASTR Same functions as function key F2, but applies to the locked RGB gamma.

F 5 white RGB Same functions as function key F1, but applies to the individual RGB gain values.

F 6 white MASTR Same functions as function key F2, but applies to the locked RGB gain values.

F 7 adjust CONT(O)U(R) For adjusting the contour correction in the luminance channel (via adjust dial) with associated +/– display. The contour correction starts with ”0” and increases with ”+” values and decreases with ”–” values. For optimum adjustment Coring should be set first to 0%. The contour correction contains following grading setup adjustments: Contour Gain Balance, Peak Frequency H and Peak Frequency V (all available via function key F12 SETUP and adjust dial).

F 8 adjust COR(I)NG Reduces the contour enhancement for fine low contrast details like grain. The standard value 0% applies the selected amount of aperture enhancement to all details.

F 9 adjust CHROM(INANCE) For adjusting color saturation (via adjust dial) with associated display.

F 10 unity ALL Pressing the function key resets changed level settings to standard values. The points in the RGB circles and the bar graphs jump back to the center.

4-48 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.6 Grading Menu FCP

F 11 6SC Pressing the function key opens the submenu 6SC, it serves for setting the secondary color correction. Operation of the secondary color correction is described in a separate manual which is supplied when buying this option. Customer Manual “Mounting & Operating Instructions 6SC”, FU 0095, order no. 0 126 629 500.

F 12 SETUP (opens window, see section 4.6.1) Grading basic settings

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-49 4.6 Grading Menu FCP STE-B1

4.6.1 GRADING SETUP

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 428: Grading menu with window ”Grading Setup”

Window ”Grading Setup” is opened by pressing key F12 ”SETUP” in main menu ”GRADING.” This window serves to adjust grading basic settings. Selection of the individual parameters is made with digipot ”adjust dial” or the cursor keys. Depending on the selection, the softkey assignment changes in the opened window. Depending on the assignment, the function keys F1 to F8 are used to change the switching status. Pressing function key F9 (EXIT) stores the new selection, closes the window and returns the user to main menu GRADING.

Overview The meanings and the possible selections of the individual parameters are explained below. Factory adjustments are bold printed.

4-50 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.6 Grading Menu FCP

4.6.1.1 Grading Setup menu ”CRT GAMMA” (Cathode Ray Tube)

Shadow Telecine signals additionally get a fixed gamma pre-equalization which corresponds to the crt characteristic curve of a display monitor. For this reason, a pre-equalized staircase signal of the Shadow Telecine is repre- sented linear on the monitor again. Selection: ON / OFF F 1 ”OFF” Crt gamma off (for test purposes when setting into operation)

F 2 ”ON” Crt gamma on (during operation)

CRT gamma for Note! “Data conversion For the conversion modes TVLEV and GRLEV, CRT gamma is normally switched modes” “ON”, but may be switched “OFF” for pure linear video signals. In all other data conversion modes CRT gamma is not selectable but “ON” - with exception mode LOG CRT gamma is “OFF” - to achieve the transfer characteristic of the selected data conversion mode.

4.6.1.2 Grading Setup menu ”COLOR”F

For switching off the color information. Selection: ON / OFF

F 1 ”OFF” for black/white films

F 2 ”ON” for color films

4.6.1.3 Grading Setup menu ”CONTOUR GAIN BAL.”

For balance adjustment between H and V contour correction (fading in 7 steps). Selection: H only / H3/V1 / H3/V2 / H3/V3 / H2/V3 / H1/V3 / V only F 1 ”H only” only H contour correction adjustable

F 2 to F 6 ”H3/V1, H3/V2, H3/V3, H2/V3, H1/V3” H and V contour correction adjustable

F 7 ”V only” only V contour correction adjustable

F 9 ”EXIT” closes the window, goes back to the grading menu

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-51 4.6 Grading Menu FCP STE-B1

4.6.1.4 Grading Setup menu ”PEAK FREQUENCY H or V”

For adjusting the range of the horizontal or vertical peak frequency. Selection: 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / EXIT F 1 to F 3 ”1 - 3” contour correction effects on coarse details

F 4 to F 6 ”4 - 6” contour correction effects on fine details

F 7 ”7”contour correction effects on very fine details

F 8 ”EXIT” closes the window, goes back to the grading menu

4.6.1.5 Grading Setup menu “Ranges”

Parameter for the ranges of the primary color correction, see also chapter 4.6.1.10 Selection: NORM / EXTD

F 1 ”NORM” normal (standard) values of the primary color correction

F 2 “EXTD” extended ranges for the primary color correction

4.6.1.6 Grading Setup menu “Black Gamma Mode”

Selection: H_CO / L_CO / LINEA / L_STR / H_STR F 1 “H_CO” High black compression: e.g. 20% level changes to 5%

F 2 “L_CO” Low black compression: e.g. 20% level changes to 12%

F 3 “LINEA” Linear level, no changes

F 4 “L_STR” Low black stretch: e.g. 20% level changes to 28%

F 5 “H_STR” High black stretch: e.g. 20% level changes to 35%

4-52 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.6 Grading Menu FCP

4.6.1.7 Grading Setup menu “White Gamma Mode”

Selection: H_CO / L_CO / LINEA / L_STR / H_STR F 1 “H_CO” High white compression: e.g. 80% level changes to 95%

F 2 “L_CO” Low white compression: e.g. 80% level changes to 88%

F 3 “LINEA” Linear white, no changes

F 4 “L_STR” Low white stretch: e.g. 80% level changes to 70%

F 5 “H_STR” High white stretch: e.g. 80% level changes to 61%

4.6.1.8 Grading Setup menu “6 SC limiter”

The 6 Sector Color Processor provides a built-in color legalizing for RGB signals. The following adjustments can be made: F 1 “OFF” Full Cr / Cb range -7% ...108%

F 2 “S108” Limited RGB range, luminance soft limit -7% ...108%

F 3 “H 108” Limited RGB range, luminance hard limit -7% ...108%

F 4 “S102” Limited RGB range, luminance soft limit 0% ...102%

F 5 “H 102” Limited RGB range, luminance hard limit 0% ...102%

F 6 “S100” Limited RGB range, luminance soft limit 0% ...100%

F 7 “H 100” Limited RGB range, luminance hard limit 0% ...100%

“S” stands for soft limit luminance signal, where a knee characteristic is applied. “H” refers to hard limit luminance signal, clipping is applied.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-53 4.6 Grading Menu FCP STE-B1

Attention! The RGB value is given for the output of the 6SC Board, not for the output of the telecine. The output signal will be further processed using contour and sizing setup parameters. “6 SC limiter” processing may have an effect on the maximum RGB values.

4.6.1.9 Grading Setup menu “6 SC illegal color” (mark)

If “ON”, all illegal colors, according to the selected limit mode will be highlighted by inverting the luminance signal.

Note! It is recommended to set the limit mode to “S108” and the “6 SC illegal color to “OFF” when using the 6SC color correction.

4-54 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.6 Grading Menu FCP

4.6.1.10 Extended Color Correction Ranges

Test & Operating Sequence

1. For testing, select menu Monitoring

2. Press F1 select PATTN

3. Choose test signal SAW_14 - F3 select PATTN - use adjust dial or cursor key

4. Press F4 pattern ON

saw_14

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12 Fig. 429: Monitoring Menu

5. Select menu Grading

6. Set all parameter to unity ALL - F10

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 430: Grading Menu

7. Select F12 SETUP from the menu Grading

8. Select parameter RANGES from the table GRADING SETUP

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-55 4.6 Grading Menu FCP STE-B1

9. Set extended ranges with - F2 EXTD

M_Burst 10% 90% 60% ARE

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 431:

10. Close window GRADING SETUP - F9 EXIT

“Extended ranges” are now activated with the controls lift, gamma and gain F1 lift RGB Range from –100% to +100% F2 lift MASTR Range from –100% to +100% F3 gamma RGB Range "60% of Master Range F4 gamma MASTR Range from 0 to 2.5 F5 gain RGB Range from 0% to 200% F6 gain MASTR Range from 0% to 1000%

Attention! In “extended range” mode, Unity All results in a different grading comparable to “normal ranges”; gain changes to 500% of the standard value and gamma changes from 1 to 1.25. Changing from “normal range” to “extended range” - and in the other way round - requires a re-adjustment of black (lift) , gamma and white (gain). Details of “Unity” adjustment for extended range, see chapter 4.6.1.12.

4-56 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.6 Grading Menu FCP

4.6.1.11 Grading Recommendation in “Extended Range” Mode

In order to reduce the reciprocal influence of the controls, it is recommended to start adjustment with gamma, then do lift and finally gain.

Gamma With F4 - Master gamma (0 - 2.5), the peak level of the “saw_14 test signal” can adjustment be changed from 42% up to 100% and down to 7.5%.

MASTER gamma

2.5 0.5

F 3 F 4 Fig. 432:

In “normal range”, Master gamma addresses only the grey values of a film scene and changes not the black and white levels. In “extended range”, Master gamma also changes black and white. F3 - RGB Gamma changes the Master Gamma value between 40% to 160%.

Lift adjustment After gamma adjustment, it is recommended to adjust the black level with the lift controls F1 and F2 close to 0%. Note that in extended ranges the lift controls also affects the white level. Both, lift Master and lift RGB can be changed in the range of "100%, but the sum is limited to "100%.

F 1 F 2 Lift "100%

Fig. 433:

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-57 4.6 Grading Menu FCP STE-B1

Gain adjustment Finally adjust the white level of the saw-14 signal with gain to the desired value. F5 - Gain RGB range 0% - 200% F6 - Gain Master range 0% - 1000%

gain RGB 0% - 200%

F 5 F 6 gain MASTER 0% - 1000% Fig. 434:

4.6.1.12 Adjustment of the Unity Values in the “Extended Range” Mode

For the “normal mode” and UNITY for all color corrections, you will see a straight sawtooth line on the waveform monitor.

When switching color corrections between “normal” to “extended range” mode the previous settings are not scaled to the other control range and the look of the image changes!

If the neutral position of “extended mode” is not yet stored on your telecine controller, it can be found by the following procedure:

1. Select the 100% sawtooth test signal Menu Monitoring - F1 select PATTN - F3 saw

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12 Fig. 435:

4-58 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.6 Grading Menu FCP

2. Select menu Film - F12 film SETUP - F1 print POS

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 436:

3. Set all matching controls to UNITY Menu Film - F11 unity ALL

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 437:

4. Switch CRT Gamma OFF Menu Grading - F12 SETUP CRT Gamma - F1 OFF

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 438:

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-59 4.6 Grading Menu FCP STE-B1

5. Select “extended ranges” Menu Grading - F12 SETUP - Ranges - F2 EXTD

M_Burst 10% 90% 60% ARE

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 439:

Adjustment If you switch to “extended range “ mode, you will get a curved and clipped saw- Unity Values tooth signal. By using the Shadow color correction controls of the telecine controller you can now adjust and straighten the sawtooth line again. Please store Black, Gamma and White controls as UNITY for the “extended range” mode on the telecine controller.

Unity in The Grading menu displays the “unity values” in “extended mode” as shown in the Extended Range next figure. Mode

MASTER gamma 1

F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 MASTER gain 100% Fig. 440:

The Shadow specifications do not apply to “extended range” mode. Us- ing “extended range” may result in lower signal-to-noise distortion, depending on the adjustments.

4-60 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.6 Grading Menu FCP

4.6.1.13 High Density Range in Print NEG Mode

In PRINT NEG mode, a higher density range on negative film with no orange mask can be scanned in “extended range” mode.

The density range is extended beyond the standard range (0 - 2) up to 0 - 4. This feature is activated when “extended range” is selected in the Grading menu

M_Burst 10% 90% 60% ARE

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 441:

and the film type PRINT NEG is chosen in the Film menu - F12 film SETUP

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12 Fig. 442:

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-61 4.6 Grading Menu FCP STE-B1

4.6.1.14 Black Stretch / Compression

With black stretch/compression the contrast in dark picture areas can be either enlarged or reduced. Four different characteristics according to the diagram in figure 444 are available. Unlike Master gamma, bright picture areas are less affected by this adjustment. The black level is kept constant as well. To use black stretch/compression, select menu Grading 1. Press F12 SETUP. 2. Choose parameter BLACK GAMMA MODE from the table GRADING SETUP. The Grading Setup window is now opened.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 443:

The different curves in black are: F1 H_CO High (big) black compression: e.g. 20% level changes to 5% F2 L_CO Low (small) black compression: e.g. 20% level changes to 12% F3 LINEA linear level, no changes F4 L_STR Low (small) black stretch: e.g. 20% level changes to 28% F5 H_STR High (big) white stretch: e.g. 20% level changes to 35%

100% White

big stretch

small stretch

small compress

big compress 0% Black

Fig. 444: Black stretch / compression

4-62 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.6 Grading Menu FCP

4.6.1.15 White Stretch / Compression

With white stretch/compression, the contrast in bright picture areas can be either enlarged or reduced. Four different characteristics according to the diagram in figure 446 are selectable. Unlike Master Gamma, dark picture areas are less affected by this adjustment. Note that white stretch does not lead to any clipping of highlights (luminance levels above 100%). To use white stretch / compression, select menu Grading 1. Press F12 SETUP 2. Choose parameter White GAMMA MODE from the table GRADING SETUP The Grading Setup window is opened.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12 Fig. 445:

The different curves in white are: F1 H_CO High (big) white compression: e.g. 80% level changes to 95% F2 L_CO Low (small) white compression: e.g. 80% level changes to 88% F3 LINEA linear level, no changes F4 L_STR Low (small) white stretch: e.g. 80% level changes to 70% F5 H_STR High (big) white stretch: e.g. 80% level changes to 61%

small 100% compress White big compress

small stretch

big stretch

0% Black

Fig. 446:

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-63 4.6 Grading Menu FCP STE-B1

4.6.1.16 Black and White Gamma combined

By combining black and white compression, a print film look can be generated. To use this, select menu Grading.

1. Press F12 SETUP 2. Choose parameter BLACK GAMMA MODE from the table GRADING SETUP The Grading Setup window is now opened

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 9

Fig. 447:

The different curves for black compression are, see figure 449 F1 H_CO High (big) black compression: e.g. 20% level changes to 5% F2 L_CO Low (small) black compression: e.g. 20% level changes to 12%

F3 LINEA linear level, no changes

3. Close window Grading Setup by pressing F9 EXIT 4. Then press F12 SETUP again 5. Choose parameter White GAMMA MODE from the table GRADING SETUP. The Grading Setup window is opened.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 9

Fig. 448:

4-64 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.6 Grading Menu FCP

The different curves for white compressed are, see 449 F1 H_CO High (big) white compression: e.g. 80% level changes to 95% F2 L_CO Low (small) white compression: e.g. 80% level changes to 88% F3 LINEA linear level, no changes

small white White 100% compress

big white compress

small black compress

big black Black 0% compress

Fig. 449: Combining black and white compress

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-65 4.6 Grading Menu FCP STE-B1

4-66 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.7 Time Code Menu FCP

4.7 TIME CODE MENU

1 2 3 4

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 450: Time code menu

The ”Timecode” menu is selected by pressing the menu selection key ”Timecode” on the control panel.

The menu serves to adjust the frame accurate counting of film frames, keycode (4 perf 35mm film and 1perf 16mm film ) and Linear Timecode.

LTC compatible to the SMPTE 12M standard is available at J41 B LTC OUT Rack3 and will always be generated in “non drop frame mode”.

Assignment of userbits If a keycode reader is installed, the keycode will be mapped into the userbits

Restrictions of LTC operation

D LTC transfer via TE 4101 Transfer Engine Package 101 The transfer of LTC via Transfer Engine 101 to a workstation (e.g. OS2 / SGI) causes a fixed delay of one frame. Example: Shadow Telecine sends LTC 00:00:00:00, Transfer Engine reads 00:00:00:01. Problem will be solved with one of the next software releases.

D LTC synchronizing for SEPMAG players Do not feed the audio signal of an externally connected Sepmag player, synchronized with LTC output (J41 B LTC OUT Rack 3) from the STE-B1, through the audio system of the STE-B1 - Audio 1/2 In to Audio 1/2 Out - for a signal mix of STE-B1 audio and Sepmag audio. In this case audio is delayed versus video, because it passes the telecine audio delay which is active for audio, coming from the audio head of the Shadow Tele- cine. A Sepmag player synchronized with the bi-phase signal (J 56 SEPMAG OUT Rack 2) from the STE-B1 operates correct, audio / video are synchronal.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-67 4.7 Time Code Menu FCP STE-B1

D Drop frame / Non drop frame mode Drop-frame compensation for the 59.94 Hz standard is not supported. The Shadow operates always in “non drop frame mode”. That means, that for film speeds 30 or 24 fps and TV standard “59.94 Hz inter- lace” always 30 / 24 timecode values are generated.

D Counting mode for progressive standards For all 59.94 / 60 Hz progressive standards one time code value is allocated to two frames.

Overview (see Fig. 450)

1 Display of the current keycode (embedded in DPX data)

2 Display of current time code Display in hours : minutes : seconds : frames (hh : mm : ss : fr fr)

3 Selection of the time code frame count mode

4 Settings of LTC (Linear Time Code) - for future use!

Function key

F 2 Keycode SETUP from the Timecode menu For adjusting the reader head offset as described in chapter 4.7.2.1 or 4.7.2.3, activate the function key F2. Window “Keycode Setup” will be opened, see chapter 4.7.1.

F 6 set ATTRB Selection of the standard-dependent timecode operation mode. Selection is made by pressing function key F6 and turning the adjust dial or pressing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F6 (toggle mode). Following frame count modes are selectable: 24 frames: for 24 frames/sec and 60 or 59.94 Hz video systems 25 frames: for 25 frames/sec and 50 Hz video systems 30 frames: for 30 frames/sec and 60 Hz video systems 30 comp.*: for 24 frames/sec and 60 or 59,94 Hz video systems

* Note: 30 comp. = 30 frames compensated In 24 fps mode the frames are numbered from 0 to 29, but each fifth digit is dropped: 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10,11, 12, 13, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 21,22, 23, 25, 26, 27, 28, 0, 1, 2,....

4-68 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.7 Time Code Menu FCP

F 9 set MODE

Serves to select linear timecode operation mode. Following LTC count modes are selectable: “TV-TCGEN” In this mode the LTC signal is locked to the TV signal and has to be used when the timecode output of the film scanner is connected to the timecode input of a video tape recorder. For every video frame, a unique timecode number will be generated. For 24 fps film speed and 59.94 /60 Hz TV-systems the repeat rate of video fields is taken into account. This mode can only be used with the following settings:

TV Standard Film speed TC-Attrib 1 50Hz 25 fps 25 2 59.9Hz/60Hz ** 24 fps 24 3 59.9Hz/60Hz ** 30 fps 30 4 24 progressive 24 fps 24 5 59.94Hz/60Hz pro- 24 fs 24 *** gressive

** = non drop frame mode *** = Two frames are allocated to one time code value

“Film-fixed” Operates like mode TV-TCGEN, but the frame numbers are always related to film. Therefore TC numbers with the same value can be transmitted multiple times at slow speeds. Frame numbering is done according the ATTRIB setting (function key F6)

“Film-variable” In mode FILM-variable, the LTC frequency is variable in the range from 12 fps to 57 fps. For every video frame a unique timecode number will be generated. For all other speeds the FILM-fixed mode will be used automatically. Frame numbering is done according the ATTRIB setting (function key F6).

Note! LTC displayed in the TC-field of each main menu is calculated according to the LTC of the Timecode Menu (see also parameter “ATTRB” F6).

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-69 4.7 Time Code Menu FCP STE-B1

F 11 set DELAY “0” no delay of LTC signal “1 - 3” 1 - 3 frame(s) delay of LTC signal

Different delays can be selected in order to match the timecode signal with delays introduced by other external devices. LTC setting can be selected between 0 and 3 frames. The default delay after a power-up is 0 frames. Changing LTC delay is only accepted when the filmdeck is in STOP mode.

Delay selection is made by pressing function key F11 and turning the adjust dial or pressing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F11 (toggle mode).

4.7.1 KEYCODE SETUP

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 451: Timecode submenu “Keycode Setup”

Window “Keycode Setup” is opened by actuating function key F2. The window serves to set the keycode parameter “Keycode position” and “head offset” manually or via learn mode automatically.

F 5 set POSIT serves to set Keycode position (always perf 1 for 16mm films) and determine the “Zero Frame Reference Mark” at the perforation holes 1 - 4 for 35mm film.

F 6 learn START starts the learn mode for setting the “Head offset” in “perforation holes”.

F 7 set HEAD serves to adjust the “Head offset” in “perforation holes” manually.

4-70 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.7 Time Code Menu FCP

4.7.2 CHECKING AND OPERATING KEYCODE GENERATION

The operating procedure applies to keycode data reproduction and insertion into EVERTZ / AATON the ancillary data of the HiPPI output, generated by a keycode reader from the Keycode Reader manufacturers EVERTZ and AATON Keylink System V.8.

Pre-conditions D Currently the system operates only with 4 perf 35mm and 1 perf 16mm films & correct. Restrictions D The errorfree counting of the keycode offset for 3 perf 35mm films can be supported with a software change by AATON / Evertz and Thomson. This will be available later as a software upgrade. D 2, 6 and 8 perf film material are not supported from the AATON and EVERTZ keycode reader.

Note concerning Keycode Reader setup!

The setup procedure for 16mm and 35mm (1, 3, 4 perf) film material is the same. 1. Check the connection from the keycode reader head to the reader device (de- Keycode In coder). 2. Check the connection from the keycode reader device (decoder)

EVERTZ: “Serial I/O” to the keycode reader input of Shadow Rack 2 - Keycode In J 69 (9-pin / RS232). J 69 Cable Evertz 5500 / 5550 STE-B1 Sub-D 9-pin (male) Sub-D 9-pin (male) 3 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2 Tx 2 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3 Rx 5 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 5 GND

AATON: “Keylink Com 1” to the keycode reader input of STE-B1 Rack 2 - Keycode In J 69 (9-pin / RS 232).

Cable 1 AATON STE-B1 Sub-D 25-pin (male) Sub-D 9-pin (male) 3 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2 Tx 2 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3 Rx 7 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 5 GND 25 9

Rack 2 Cable 2 (is part of the AATON Keylink System) Various out Keylink PC “MTC board top socket” to the bi-phase sync signal output of STE-B1 TC Gen out Rack 2 - TC Gen out - J 51 (9 pin / control interface)

J 51

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-71 4.7 Time Code Menu FCP STE-B1

3. Only for AATON Reader! Adjust bi-phase pulse to one pulse per frame.

Select menu SETUP Press F5 - setup FILMD Choose parameter “TCgen out coupling” and set F3 -1*BP

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 452: Setup Menu

4. Thread a 16mm or 35mm film with keycode. 5. Select Play mode 6. Adjust the keycode reader settings (film type, intensity, ...) as described in the keycode reader manual (EVERTZ/AATON). 7. Open the Timecode menu

The current keycode should be displayed, “count” and “offset” values should change.

Note! If question marks are displayed, repeat step 5!

F 1 F 2 F 3

Fig. 453: Section of the Time Code menu

4-72 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.7 Time Code Menu FCP

8. Select STOP mode 9. Enter F2 - Keycode SETUP from the Timecode menu Window “Keycode Setup” will be opened Adjust the reader head offset as described in chapter 4.7.2.1 or 4.7.2.3 10. Check that the correct reader type is displayed in the keycode setup window, reader type: EVERTZ, AATON or ARRI

Reader Type AATON or EVERTZ is recognized via RS 232 interface Rack 2 - J 69 KEYCODE IN

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 454: Timecode submenu “Keycode Setup”

4.7.2.1 Manual Setup

1. Set head offset in “perforation holes” (default value: 60) Adjust Distance (amount of perforation holes) between reader head and film gate; Reader offset approx. 60 perfs or 15 frames for a 35mm 4 perf film. Use the numeric keypad to insert the “head offset” value.

2. Set keycode position (always “perf-1” for 16mm films) F5 set POSIT

Zero Frame Determine the “Zero Frame Reference Mark” at the perforation holes 1 - 4, for Reference Mark example “perf 3” as shown in the next figure.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-73 4.7 Time Code Menu FCP STE-B1

Zero Frame Count + Offset

5666 + 01 5666 + 00 5665 + 15

35mm 4 perf Film with Keycode

4 3 2 1 22 2324 5666

Manuf. Film Reel Film Zero Frame reference mark Bar Code ID ID ID Length “keycode position perf. 3” Fig. 455: Keycode position and head offset are set manually!

F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10

Fig. 456: Keycode Setup

3. Check the keycode

Play a short piece of film and take care that any keycode is read on the reader device and compare the keycode of the currently scanned frame with the displayed code in the Timecode menu.

4-74 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.7 Time Code Menu FCP

Field Keycode

Count: Film length in feet Offset: Frame offset (e.g. 0 - 15 for 4 perf 35mm film)

Prefix = Ident of film roll 5678 Count = Film lenght in feet Offset = Frame offset

F 1 F 2 F 3

Fig. 457: Section of the Timecode menu

4.7.2.2 Remarks concerning the keycode numbering

Important! In general the system ensures that the keycode numbering related to the film frames is always correct for the different film (1, 3, 4) perforations.

Keycode numbering To avoid an ambiguity of the keycode to the film frame the keycode offset is calcu- for 3, 4, perf 35mm lated according to “SMPTE Recommended Practice RP 195-1998” as follows: films Keycode number repetition rate K (64 perf) modulo the frame repetition rate R (e.g. 4 perf per frame for a 4 perf 35mm film). For details, see the next table. Offset matching for 35mm films Keycode number repetition rate = 64 perfs!

Frame Repetition Rate Keycode Count Offset Perf/Frame 3 xxxx +00 .... +20 (21 frames) foot1/2/4/5 +00 .... +21 (22 frames) foot 3/6/... 4 xxxx +00 ... +15 (16 frames)

Defining the first foot of 3 perf films: The first foot is the foot in which the reference mark appears within the first K-modulo-R perforations.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-75 4.7 Time Code Menu FCP STE-B1

Example: In numbering the frames of 35mm 3 perf, by convention, the first foot and second foot each include 21 frames, numbered +00 through +20, and the third foot includes 22 frames, numbered +00 through +21. The first foot is the foot in which the reference mark appears at the first perforation after the frame line at the start of the foot, as shown below.

Zero Frame Count + Offset

5666 + 01 5666 + 00 5665 + 21 5665 + 20

35mm 3 perf Film with Keycode

3 2 1 22 2324 5666

Manuf. Film Reel Film Zero Frame reference mark Bar Code ID ID ID Length “keycode position perf. 1” Fig. 458:

Offset matching for 16mm films Keycode numbering Keycode number repetition rate = 20 perfs! for 1 perf 16mm films Perf/Frame Keycode Count Offset 1 xxxx +00 .... +19

4-76 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.7 Time Code Menu FCP

4.7.2.3 Learn Mode “Head Offset”

1. Mark a reference frame on the film and note the respective keycode (count) printed on the film edge and the offset which is the number of frames between the keycode and the marked frame.

2. Park the film at the reference frame (Film gate position)

3. Set count and offset of the reference frame from step 1. Timecode menu F2 SETUP Set both with the numeric keypad.

4. Set keycode position (always “per 1” for 16mm films) F5 set POSIT. Determine the perforation hole which is marked with the dot of the “Zero Frame Reference Mark” (for example “perf 3” as shown in figure 455).

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 459: Timecode submenu “Keycode Setup”

5. Press F6 learn START

While the Shadow is in the “learn mode”, softkey F6 function changes from “START” to “STOP” . Using F6 “STOP” aborts the “learn mode”.

6. Rewind a short piece of film

Select PLAY mode and transfer the scene which includes the reference frame. Take care, that at least one keycode is read during this transfer. If the Shadow has learned the head offset successfully, learn mode softkey F6 changes its function again to “START”. If an error occurs during this procedure, a warning message will be displayed. Then you have to retry the head offset learning procedure.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-77 4.7 Time Code Menu FCP STE-B1

7. Check the keycode Play a short piece of film and take care that any keycode is read on the reader device and compare the keycode of the currently scanned frame with the displayed code (count & offset) in the Timecode menu. Field Keycode: Count: FIlm length in feet Offset: Frame offset

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 460: Time code menu

4.7.2.4 Remarks concerning “Keycode in Data”

Data Output D For inserting keycode in DPX data, the option TE 4101 Transfer Engine Pack- age including FY 4345 Data Output board and the serial I/O Hippi interface is required. D The keycode generated in the Shadow Telecine is only available in the DPX Data, not at the video outputs.

Servo Locked D Keycode is only evaluated if the servo is locked.

If count D If keycode “count” and “offset” do not match to the right frame, please check errors occur that the keycode position (reference dot) and “head offset” are properly adjusted.

Auto Adjust D If the keycode position (reference dot position) changes during a transfer with a fixed speed, the system automatically adjusts the new position. Note for EVERTZ Reader! This works only, if at least one keycode before the position change and one keycode after the change are read with the same speed and play direction.

Reader Type D The reader type is automatically adjusted after the reader has read and transferred any key code to the STE-B1.

The Standard D Additional information about the keycode standard see also www.kodak.com.

4-78 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.8 Multi Cue Menu FCP

4.8 MULTI CUE MENU

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

00 : 01 : 38 : 07 7 6 5 00 : 01 : 38 : 14 00 : 01 : 38 : 21 00 : 01 : 39 : 00 00 : 03 : 46 : 00 00 : 03 : 48 : 21 00 : 03 : 52 : 00

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

11 10 9

Fig. 461: Multi Cue menu

The ”Multi Cue” menu is selected by actuating the menu selection key ”MULTI CUE” on the control panel. In this menu, up to 99 cue entries for film frame search can be selected and saved. Menu functions: D Cue entry D Selection of the entry mode D Display of the cue entry list D Graphic display of the cue entry positions D Display of TC, TT, UB

Overview

1 Symbolic display of the film

2 Pointer for current film position, symbolizes the cue read head

3 Display of up to 7 cue entries to the left and up to 7 cue entries to the right of the marker 2 , which are within the defined area on display 11 (maximum dist. from act:). To the right of the marker are the cue entries already passed, to the left are those ones not yet reached. The distance between the cue entries and the mark 2 in the graphics corresponds to the distance of the cue entries to the cue read head on the film. If, for reasons of space, this distance cannot be indicated, the cue entries will close up in the graphics.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-79 4.8 Multi Cue Menu FCP STE-B1

4 Display of up to eight already passed cue entries contained in table 6 (in form of small points), which are outside the area defined on display 11 . The number of displayed points (up to eight) corresponds to the actual number of the already passed cue entries. With more than 8 cue entries, the display does not change anymore. In the left reel are shown the still following cue entries outside the area defined on display 11 .

5 Cue entry table with cue entry numbers (1 to 99) for selecting a field in table 6 . The pointer following the roller bar, points in table 6 to the field in which a new cue entry value is to be entered.

6 Cue entry table with up to 99 cue entry values. The film position selected with the roller bar is reached after pressing key ”Search.”

Entry The Multicue menu offers the following possibilities for making cue entries: D Entering via the numeric keyboard and the ”In” key. D Transferring current time code values as cue entries via the ”In” key on the Cue panel. D Transferring current time code values as cue entries via the ”In” key outside this menu (after selection of ”script CUE”). D Transferring ”In” points FREEZE outside this menu (after selection of ”script FRZ”).

7 Film supply display in minutes or feet. For details see section 4.3.

8 Current display of times code (TC), tape time (TT) or user bits (UB) Display in hours : minutes : seconds : frames.

9 Cue time display for search run in hours : minutes : seconds : frames. The value of a selected field in table 6 is transferred to this point. Pressing key ”Search” starts a search run to this film position.

Note:

The displays 8 and 9 are identical with those in the Home menu (see section 4.3).

10 Entry field for manual input of cue entries by means of the numeric keyboard. Pressing key ”In” on the Cue panel transfers the entered value to the field selected via table 5 in table 6 . That field is selected to which the pointer beside table 5 is pointing.

4-80 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.8 Multi Cue Menu FCP

11 Display and entry field of maximum distance to the current time code position. Up to 14 cue entries, 7 to the left and 7 to the right of the mark 2 , being within the indicated area, are displayed as boxes. Values outside this area, are displayed as small points in the left or right reel of the film symbol. The small white field under display 11 points to the source delivering the display (max. DIST).

Function keys

F 1 auto INCR Being activated (softkeys INCR lights), the cue entry selected in table 6 , is reached each time key ”Search” is pressed. Subsequently, the roller bar automatically moves in the table to the next entry underneath. The key operates in toggle mode (on/off).

F 2 script CUE Being activated (softkey CUE lights), the respective time code is entered as a cue entry to table 6 independent of the currently selected menu, each time the key is pressed on the Cue panel. The value is written to that place being marked by the pointer of the cue entry table 5 .

The key operates in toggle mode (on/off). When ”script CUE” is not activated and the entry field 10 is empty, the respective time code is transferred as a cue entry to table 6 only with selected Multicue menu by pressing the ”In” key.

F 3 script FRZ Being activated (softkey FREEZE lights), the respective time code is entered as a freeze point to table 6 each time the ”In” key on the Cue panel is pressed independent of of the currently selected menu. The value is written to that place being marked by the pointer of the cue entry table 5 . The key operates in toggle mode (on/off). When script FREEZE is not activated and the entry field 10 is empty, the respective time code is transferred as a cue entry to table 6 only with selected Multicue menu by pressing the ”In” key.

F 4 max. DIST Pressing F4 and turning the adjust dial adjusts the area before and after the current time code position on display 11 , where cue entries are to be displayed on the film graph as a box with inserted continuous number.

F 5 clear ONE Pressing this key deletes the selected cue entry in table 6 (by means of the pointer beside table 5 ). This has the effect that the next position in table 5 is selected.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-81 4.8 Multi Cue Menu FCP STE-B1

F 6 set pointer ENTRY Key for selecting an entry field in table 5 . The pointer moving at the right of the table, points to the field in table 6 where the next cue entry is to be entered or from which the entered value is to be deleted with F5. Selection is made by pressing F6 and turning the adjust dial or pressing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F6 (toggle mode). Pressing key ”Unity” switches directly to the beginning of the table.

F 7 set pointer CUE Key for selecting a cue entry in table 6 . The value is automatically transferred to the display 9 . After pressing key ”Search”, this cue entry is cued up. Selection is made by pressing F7 and turning the adjust dial or pressing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F7 (toggle mode).

Note:

The possibility to shift the entry and the cue cursor separately, permits storing new entries on a defined position of the list while the cue entry list is run in the search mode. This option can be switched off with F8 (tables GLUE).

F 8 tables GLUE Being activated (softkey GLUE lights), the roller bars ”glue” together in the tables 5 and 6 . With this, the entry field selected via table 5 is always identical with the cue entry selected in table 6 . Both roller bars are shifted with F6 or F7. The key operates in toggle mode (on/off). Attention!

Cue entries might here be overwritten accidently!

If tables GLUE is not activated, the entries in the tables 5 and 6 can be selected separately.

F 9 clear ALL Clear key for all entries in table 6 . Having actuated the key, an operator request appears on the display (Press again to clear all). Only after having actuated F9 once more, all entries will be cleared.

F 10 Not assigned.

F 11 Not assigned.

F 12 Not assigned.

4-82 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.9 Audio Level Menu FCP

4.9 AUDIO LEVEL MENU

1 2 3 4 5

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 462: Audio Level menu

Main menu ”Audio Level” is selected by pressing key ”AUDIO LEVEL” on the control panel. In this main menu, all adjustments are made with respect to the reproduction levels of the two audio channels and the audio monitor outputs.

Overview

Signal sources 1 The signal sources for the two audio channels shown on this display are selected in main menu ”AUDIO CONFIG.”

Scaling 2 This display shows the scaling used for the output levels (position of the 0dB mark). Adjustment is made in the window ”Audio Level Setup” (section 4.9.1).

Peak hold 3 The ”OUTPUT LEVEL” display shows the current audio output levels of the and overflow audio channels CH 1 and CH 2 in a bar graph. displays The display is provided with a peak value hold (holding time approx. 2 seconds). In case of overflow of an audio channel, an additional bar appears at the upper end of the scale during the hold time. The above example shows audio channel CH 2 overflow.The function key below each of the two level displays shows the relevant channel number.The scaling of the level displays can be adjusted. The position of the 0dB mark is defined in window ”Audio Level Setup” (section 4.9.1). The resolution can be switched over with function key F2.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-83 4.9 Audio Level Menu FCP STE-B1

Level adjustment The triangles at the left of the bar graph symbolize input level adjustments, the triangles at the right side symbolize output level adjustments.

In ”Unity”, the level adjustments are positioned on –6 dB of the maximum level (full-scale). This leads to an adjusting range of +6 dB to 90 dB for the input and output signals (audio off).

Headphone 4 The ”HEADPHONE” display serves the adjustment of the headphone volume and is assigned to headphone output socket HEADPHONE (audio connector panel, rack 1). The headphone permits a monitoring control in the left and the right audio channel.

Monitoring 5 The ”MONITORING” display refers to the two monitor output sockets MON- ITOR OUT L (left channel) and OUT R (right channel).

The left area of the window displays the signal source for the two audio monitor outputs.

Possible selections:

OFF Monitoring channel switched off.

CH 1, CH 2 Audio output channel 1 or 2 selected.

BOTH Both audio output channels selected.

The right area of the window shows the current level at the two audio monitor outputs.

Studio level 6 The studio level shown on this display is selected in window ”Audio Level Setup” (section 4.9.1).

4-84 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.9 Audio Level Menu FCP

Function keys

Input level adjustment F 1 Not assigned

Resolution F 2 resol(ution) COARS or FINE Each time, this function key is pressed, the resolution of the audio level display is switched over between high and low resolution. FINE on the display of the function key shows that the indicating range of the audio level display covers 18 dB (high-resolution display). COARS on the display of the function key shows that the indicating range of the audio level display covers 48 dB.

Select channels & F 3 channel select CH 1 Output level If the display field of this function key is light, this indicates that the output level of adjustment audio channel 1 can be changed with the adjust dial.

When the field is dark, the level of this audio channel is not influenced by a level adjustment.

Each time the function key is pressed, the status is reversed.

F 4 channel select CH 2 Same function as function key F3, but applies to audio channel 2.

F 5 not assigned

Headphone level F 6 adjust HEADP. Adjustment of the headphone volume (output socket HEADPHONE, audio connector panel, rack 1) in connection with the adjust dial. When adjusting, the levels of both audio channels are affected at the same time.

F 7 Not assigned

F 8 select channel LEFT Selection of the signal source for the left monitor output (socket MONITOR OUT L). Selection is made by pressing function key F8 and turning the adjust dial or pressing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F8 (toggle mode).

F 9 select channel RIGHT Selection of the signal source for the right monitor output (socket MONITOR OUT R). Selection is made by pressing function key F9 and turning the adjust dial or pressing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F9 (toggle mode).

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-85 4.9 Audio Level Menu FCP STE-B1

Output level F 10 levels LEFT Adjustment of the output level of the left audio monitor channel in connection with the adjust dial.

F 11 levels RIGHT Adjustment of the output level of the right audio monitor channel in connection with the adjust dial. Note:

Unless the adjust dial is has been assigned another function by one of the function keys, it only serves to adjust the two monitor output levels.

Setup F 12 SETUP Opens window ”Audio Level Setup” to adjust the scaling for the audio level display, the studio level and the balance (see section 4.9.1).

4-86 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.9 Audio Level Menu FCP

4.9.1 AUDIO LEVEL SETUP

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 463: Audio Level menu with window ”Audio Level Setup”

Window ”Audio Level Setup” is opened by pressing key F12 ”SETUP” in main menu ”AUDIO LEVEL.” This window serves to adjust the scaling for audio level display, studio level and the terminal condition. Scaling The following settings are possible for the scaling of the audio level (position of the 0dB mark opposite the 0VU mark). fulls ”Full scale”, the 0dB mark is at maximum, i.e. 20 dB above the 0VU mark. peak 9 The 0dB mark is 9 dB above the 0VU mark. peak 8 The 0dB mark is 8 dB above the 0VU mark. VU (Volume Unit) The 0dB mark is 20 dB below the maximum, i.e. at the 0VU mark. Studio level The studio level shows the output level in dBu which corresponds to a level of 0 VU in the Shadow Telecine. It is possible to select studio levels of –3 dBu, 0 dBu, 4 dBu and 8 dBu.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-87 4.9 Audio Level Menu FCP STE-B1

Function keys Scaling F 4 scale REF Selection of the scaling for the audio level displays. Selection is made by pressing function key F4 and turning the adjust dial or pressing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F4 (toggle mode).

Studio level F 5 studio LEVEL Selection of the studio level Selection is made by pressing function key F5 and turning the adjust dial or pressing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F5 (toggle mode).

Balance F 6 A1, A2, UNBAL With the studio levels of 4 dBu and 8 dBu, the output final stage has to be switched to floating if the load is unbalanced. With this, the output level is reduced by 6 dB. At –3 dBu and 0 dBu, the output is always floating.

F 7 monitor UNBAL This function key has the same function as F6, but applies to the monitor outputs.

F 8 dolby UNBAL This function key has the same function as F6, but applies to the dolby SR 1/2 outputs.

Closes window

F 9 EXIT Closes window or F 12 window CLOSE

4-88 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.9 Audio Level Menu FCP

4.9.2 OPERATING SEQUENCES

Example 1 – Setting levels of Audio 1 and 2 to –3 dBu

Conditions The studio level is –3 dBu and the 0dB marks on the audio level displays are to be 9 dB above 0 VU, coarse resolution. The input and output level adjustments of all audio channels are to be set to standard value (unity). Audio monitor outputs are not used. Use as in the following example: Possible Adaptation to the relevant studio level. application

Key sequence:

Audio level Select main menu

F 12 [SETUP] Open window

Studio level F 5 [studio LEVEL] Press and hold ”–3 dBu” select with adjust dial, release F5

Scaling F 4 [scale REF] Press and hold ”peak 9” select with adjust dial, release F4

F 9 [EXIT] Close window

F 2 [resol FINE] or [resol COARS] Select COARS

Select channels

F 3 [channel select CH 1] Select audio channel CH 1

F 4 [channel select CH 2] Select audio channel CH 2

Standard values

Unity Press, release Unity

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-89 4.9 Audio Level Menu FCP STE-B1

Example 2 – Setting levels of Audio 1 and 2 to +8 dBu, Audio Mon CH 1 and CH 2

Conditions The studio level is +8 dBu and the 0dB marks on the audio level displays are to be at 0 VU, coarse resolution. The output level adjustments of the two audio channels are to be set to standard value (unity). If the input level adjustments of the two audio channels are to be set to standard value, the data in the parentheses are applicable. At the audio monitor outputs a balanced terminal condition is given. The two audio channels CH 1 and 2 are fed to the audio monitor.

Use as in the following example: Possible Adjusting the reproduction monitoring application Key sequence:

Audio level Select main menu

F 12 [SETUP] Open window

Studio level F 5 [studio LEVEL] Press and hold ”8 dBu” select with adjust dial, release F5

F 7 [monitor BALNC] selection (display field dark)

Scaling F 4 [scale REF] Press and hold ”VU” select with adjust dial, release F4

F 9 [EXIT] Close window

F 2 [resol FINE] or [resol COARS] Select COARS (with input level adjustment:) F 2 [resol FINE] or [resol COARS] Select FINE

Channel selection

F 3 [channel select CH 1] Select audio channel CH 1

F 4 [channel select CH 2] Select audio channel CH 2

4-90 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.9 Audio Level Menu FCP

Standard values

Unity Press, release Unity

Monitor F 8 [select channel LEFT] Press and hold ”CH 1” select with adjust dial, release F8

F 9 [select channel RIGHT] Press and hold ”CH 2” select with adjust dial, release F9 Adjust Dial Adjust the monitor output levels according to personal volume impression

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-91 4.9 Audio Level Menu FCP STE-B1

4-92 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.10 Audio Config Menu FCP

4.10 AUDIO CONFIG MENU

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 464: Audio Config menu

Main menu ”Audio Config” is selected by pressing menu selection key ”Audio Con- fig” on the control panel. This main menu serves to set the configuration of the two audio channels. The channels 1 and 2 form a channel pair. The current configuration of the channel pair is graphically displayed as a block diagram. Audio channel The Shadow Telecine has two digital audio channels which can be used at the output alternatively in an analog or digital form. The digital audio interface ”AES” corresponds to the AES/EBU standard.

Audio data format AES/EBU audio data format A block of the digital audio output signal consists of 192 audio frames. The audio frame consists of the subframes A and B with 32 bits each (1 audio frame = 20.83 µ s).

Overview

Input side 1 Audio signal source selection (Commag, Comopt, External 1/2, Test) Display of the audio signal source (symbolized input sockets)

2 Dolby noise reduction (dolby A, SR)

3 Lowpass filtering

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-93 4.10 Audio Config Menu FCP STE-B1

Output side 4 External or internal locking of the audio A/D converter

5 Pre-emphasis

6 Mono/stereo changeover

7 Display of audio delay

8 Test tone selection

9 D/A conversion

10 Display of the audio outputs (symbolized output sockets) 2 analog outputs and 1 digital one (AES/EBU)

Function keys

Input side F 1 Setup to analog INPUT Opens the window for selecting the audio signal sources (see section 4.10.1 and section 4.10.6).

F 2 Not assigned

F 3 Setup analog DOLBY Opens the window for defining the dolby noise reduction (see section 4.10.2).

F 4 Setup analog LOW-Pass Opens the window for switching on the analog lowpass filter (see section 4.10.3).

F 5 Not assigned

Output side F 6 Setup digital REF. Opens the window for selecting the digital audio reference (see section 4.10.4).

F 7 Setup digital PREEM Opens the window for switching on the digital preemphasis (see section 4.10.5).

F 8 Setup digital MODE Opens the window for defining the audio channel mode mono/stereo (see section 4.10.6).

F 9 Setup digital DELAY Opens the window for defining the audio channel delay (see section 4.10.7).

4-94 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.10 Audio Config Menu FCP

F 10 Setup digital TEST Opens the window for selecting the digital audio test signals (see section 4.10.8).

F 11 Not assigned

F 12 Not assigned

Close window The windows opened with the function keys F1 to F4 and F6 to F10 can be closed again by pressing the function key once more. In addition, the window can be closed with the assigned function key EXIT or function key F12 ”Window CLOSE”.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-95 4.10 Audio Config Menu FCP STE-B1

4.10.1 SETUP INPUT SOURCE

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 465: Audio Config menu with window ”Setup Input Source”

Window ”Setup Input Source” is opened by pressing key F1 ”setup analog INPUT” in main menu ”Audio Config”. This window serves to define the audio signal sources for the displayed channel pair.

As signal sources for audio channel 1 and 2 can be selected:

Commag audio Commag Selection of commag audio for 16mm films. If this field appears hatched, commag cannot be selected, i.e. there is no commag audio for the currently used film format. Comopt audio Comopt Selection comopt audio for 16mm and 35mm films. External External 1, 2 Selection of an external audio source via socket EXTERNAL 1, 2 IN. Test tone TEST Internally, digitally produced sine wave tone (1 kHz/10 kHz, 0 VU) for test purposes. Muting OFF Optional muting of an audio channel that is not needed.

Audio Scanner 1 - COMMAG 16 - can be released :

Lift up disable Audio Scanner 1 Audio Scanner 1 will be lifted up, audio will not be scanned

Release enable Audio Scanner 1 Audio Scanner 1 will be released, ready for operation

Note:

In case of STEREO signal sources: CH 1 = Left, CH 2 = Right

4-96 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.10 Audio Config Menu FCP

Function keys

F 4 press at hold CH 1 Selection of the audio signal source for channel 1 (Commag, Comopt, External 1, Test). Selection is made by pressing function key F4 and turning the adjust dial or pressing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F4 (toggle mode).

F 5 Not assigned

F 6 press at hold CH 2 Selection of the audio signal source for channel 2 (Comopt, External 2, Test). Selection is made by pressing function key F6 and turning the adjust dial or pressing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F6 (toggle mode).

F 7 Not assigned

F 8 release CMAG Serves to set the Audio Scanner 1, COMMAG 16 MONO

disable Audio Scanner 1 will be lifted up; audio will not be scanned. enable Audio Scanner 1 will be released, ready for operation.

F 9 Not assigned

Close window

F 10 EXIT Closes the window

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-97 4.10 Audio Config Menu FCP STE-B1

4.10.2 SETUP NOISE REDUCTION

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 466: Audio Config menu with window ”Setup Noise Reduction”

Window ”Setup Noise Reduction” is opened by pressing key F3 ”setup analog DOLBY” in main menu ”Audio Config”. This window serves to define type and intensity of dolby noise reduction for both audio channels.

Function keys

F 5 press and hold CH 1 Selection of dolby noise reduction for audio channel 1. Selection is made by pressing function key F5 and turning the adjust dial or pressing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F5 (toggle mode).

The following adjustments are possible:

Dolby A Not selectable!

Dolby SR (SR: Spectral Recording) Special noise reduction via an external add-on unit.

OFF Noise reduction switched off.

F 6 Not assigned

F 7 press and hold CH 2 This function key has the same function as F5, but applies to audio channel 2.

F 8 Not assigned

F 9 adjust level CH 1 Level adjustment for noise reduction in audio channel 1 is made by pressing the function key and turning the adjust dial.

4-98 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.10 Audio Config Menu FCP

F 10 adjust level CH 2 This function key has the same function as F9, but applies to audio channel 2.

Close window

F 11 EXIT Closes the window

F 3 Window selection

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-99 4.10 Audio Config Menu FCP STE-B1

4.10.3 SETUP LOWPASS

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 467: Audio Config menu with window ”Setup Low Pass”

Window ”Setup Low Pass” is opened by pressing key F4 ”setup analog Low Pass” in main menu ”AUDIO CONFIG”. This window serves to switch on or off lowpass filters in the respective audio channel depending on the film sound . The two lowpass filters attenuate higher frequencies from 5 kHz.

Function keys

F 6 press and hold CH 1 Selection of the lowpass filter for audio channel 1. Selection is made by pressing function key F6 and turning the adjust dial or pressing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F6 (toggle mode). The following adjustments are possible: flat (standard setting) Film audio channel is not filtered. Use with good film sound quality. 5 kHz Film audio channel is filtered. Use with bad film sound quality.

F 7 Not assigned

F 8 press and hold CH 2 This function key has the same function as F6, but applies to audio channel 2.

4-100 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.10 Audio Config Menu FCP

Close window

F 10 EXIT Closes the window

F 4 Window selection

F 12 Window CLOSE

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-101 4.10 Audio Config Menu FCP STE-B1

4.10.4 SELECT REFERENCE

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 468: Audio Config menu with window ”Select Reference”

Window ”Select Reference” is opened by pressing key F6 ”setup digital REF.” in main menu ”Audio Config”. This window serves to internally or externally lock the audio A/D converter.

Function keys

F 8 press and hold REF. Selection of the locking mode together for both audio channels. Selection is made by pressing function key F8 and turning the adjust dial or pressing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F8 (toggle mode). The following adjustments are possible: int Video Locking internally. Locking of the audio A/D converters is made on the internal video signal (standard setting). ext 48 kHz Locking externally. Use when playing the film sound into an external digital audio studio which is clocked with 48 kHz.

F 9 Not assigned

Close window

F 10 EXIT Closes the window

4-102 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.10 Audio Config Menu FCP

4.10.5 SETUP PREEMPHASIS

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 469: Audio Config menu with window ”Setup Preemphasis”

Window ”Setup Preemphasis” is opened by pressing key F7 ”setup digital Preem- phasis” in main menu ”Audio Config”. This window serves to set the preemphasis for both audio input signals (preemphasis: peaking of frequency components before A/D conversion, for improving the signal-to-noise ratio). In the digital AES signal, only a preemphasis information is entered in the channel status. In the analog signal, the frequency response is equalized after D/A conversion in the output stage. Possible adjustments: OFF No preemphasis ON Switching on the CD-type preemphasis (EQ time constant: 50/15 µ s).

Function keys

F 3 press and hold PREEM Selection of the preemphasis for audio channel 1 and 2. Selection is made by pressing function key F3 and turning the adjust dial or pressing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F3 (toggle mode).

F 4 Not assigned

Close window F 5 EXIT Closes the window or

F 12 Window CLOSE

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-103 4.10 Audio Config Menu FCP STE-B1

4.10.6 SELECT OUTPUT MODE

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 470: Audio Config menu with window ”Select Output Mode”

Window ”Select Output mode” is opened by pressing key F8 ”setup digital MODE” in main menu ”AUDIO CONFIG”. This window serves to define mono or stereo mode (two-Channel). The following adjustments are possible: MONO

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 471: Audio Config menu with window ”Setup Input Source”

One channel operation (only subframe A in the digital signal used) 16mm films have always mono audio tracks. 35mm films may have mono or stereo audio tracks depending on the type. If a stereo film has to be played in mono mode, both channels are mixed with each other, their levels automatically adapted and distributed to the two audio channels.

Mono mode should only be used with stereo signal sources selected (e.g. OPT1 and OPT2 in case of 35mm stereo film or EXT1 and EXT2 in case of external stereo devices). With one input switched to OFF (not connected), mono mode is not applicable, i.e. channel routing changes to two-channel mode.

4-104 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.10 Audio Config Menu FCP

TWO CHANNEL (stereo)

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 472: Audio Config menu with window ”Setup Input Source”

2-channel operation with following allocation of the channels. Socket DIGITAL AES/EBU OUT Channel one Subframe A Channel two Subframe B Socket ANALOG AUDIO 1 OUT Channel one (Left channel with stereo sources) ANALOG AUDIO 2 OUT Channel two (Right channel with stereo sources) If a mono film is played in the two--channel mode, the 2nd channel can be used for instance with an external SEPMAG signal via ”External 1, 2” (see section 4.10.1). Function keys

F 4 press and hold MODE Selection of the mode for both displayed audio channels together. Selection is made by pressing function key F4 and turning the adjust dial or pressing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F4 (toggle mode).

F 5 Not assigned

Close window

F 6 EXIT Closes the window

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-105 4.10 Audio Config Menu FCP STE-B1

4.10.7 SETUP CHANNEL DELAY

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 473: Audio Config menu with window ”Setup Channel Delay”

Window ”Setup Channel Delay” is opened by pressing key F9 ”setup digital DELAY” in main menu ”Audio Config”. This window permits to advance or delay the position of the audio signal for being matched to the video signal, if this is required because of external delays.

The delay between video and audio signal on the different film formats is handled by the Shadow Telecine in the range from 18 to 31 fps automatically.

Function keys

F 2 adjust CH 1 Selection of the delay for audio channel 1. The display over ”adjust CH 1” shows the time in milliseconds by which the audio signal is delayed in comparison with the video signal. The adjustable delay area is within -60 ms and +1000 ms for 16mm and 35mm film formats.

Adjustment is made by pressing function key F2 and turning the adjust dial to the left or right in 10ms steps.

F 3 Not assigned

F 4 adjust CH 2 This function key has the same function as F2, but applies to audio channel 2.

F 5 Not assigned

Close window

F 6 EXIT Closes the window

4-106 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.10 Audio Config Menu FCP

4.10.8 SELECT TEST TONE

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 474: Audio Config menu with window ”Select Test Tone”

Window ”Select Test Tone” is opened by pressing key F10 ”setup digital TEST” in main menu ”Audio Config”. This window permits to switch over the test tone from 1kHz (standard setting) to 10 kHz. The test tone is switched on as described in section 4.10.1.

Function keys

F 5 press and hold TEST Selection of the test tone for the audio channels. Selection is made by pressing function key F5 and turning the adjust dial or pressing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F5 (toggle mode).

F 6 Not assigned

Close window

F 7 EXIT Closes the window

F 10 Window selection

F 12 Window CLOSE

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-107 4.10 Audio Config Menu FCP STE-B1

4-108 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.11 Monitoring Menu FCP

4.11 MONITORING MENU

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 475: Monitoring menu

Main menu ”Monitoring” is selected by pressing key ”MONITORING” on the control panel. This main menu serves to select the monitoring video signals for reproduction via different oscilloscopes, vectorscopes and color monitors. An extensive test signal selection as well as a selective test point and channel selection enable fast localization for errors.

Overview

1 Signal source: analog signal processing

2 FPN store (FPN: Fixed Pattern Noise, pattern noise compensation in the white areas, rack 2)

3 Color correction with matching/gamma, gain/lift and masking stage (rack 2)

4 Spatial processor with sizing, matrix and contour correction (rack 3)

5 Standard and High Definition output interface with YCrCb/RGB matrix stage and D/A converter for the analog or digital outputs

6 Symbols for the digital, the analog (both rack 3) and the WFM output of the Shadow Telecine (rack 2)

7 General information window; gives information about the monitoring setup settings (see section 4.11.3).

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-109 4.11 Monitoring Menu FCP STE-B1

Function keys The following adjustments can be selected via function keys.

F 1 select PATT(ER)N Opens windows for selecting test signal sources. (see section 4.11.1)

F 2 to F 3 testpoint << or >> Selection of test points in the monitoring signal path. After pressing the function key F2 or F3 a thick arrow appears in the monitoring menu which shows the actual signal selection. Repeated pressing gives access to further test points. The monitoring signal is switched off when the arrow vanishes. Following test points are selectable: Test point ”FPN Store” Test point ”matching/gamma stage of the color correction” Test point ”gain/lift stage of the color correction” Test point ”masking stage of the color correction” Test point ”spatial processor stage” (with sizing, matrix and contour correction) Test point ”YCrCb/RGB matrix stage” Test point ”digital lowpass output”

F 4 channel select R / CR Selection of red (or CR) channel for monitor, oscilloscope or vectorscope. Channel selection is made by pressing function key F4. Switching-over to another channel is made by pressing the function keys F5 to F7.

F 5 channel select G / Y This function key has the same function as F4, but applies to the green (or Y) channel.

F 6 channel select B / CB This function key has the same function as F4, but applies to the blue (or CB) channel.

F 7 channel select SUP Selection of RGB (or YCRCB) channels superimposed on the oscilloscope. Switching-over to a single channel is made by pressing the function keys F4 to F6.

F 8 channel select PARAD(E) Selection of RGB (or YCRCB) channels sequential on the oscilloscope. Switching-over to a single channel is made by pressing the function keys F4 to F6.

F 9 channel select VECT(OR) Switchover oscilloscope to vector display (only in YCRCB operation).

4-110 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.11 Monitoring Menu FCP

F 10 display 1H (2H) Oscilloscope 1H / 2H display switchover for the function keys F4 to F7.

F 11 preset WFM opens window, see section 4.11.2.

F 12 SETUP opens window, see section 4.11.3.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-111 4.11 Monitoring Menu FCP STE-B1

4.11.1 SELECT TEST PATTERN

saw_14 M_Burst 10% 90% 60%Are

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 476: Monitoring menu with window ”Test Pattern Select”

Window ”Test Pattern Select” is selected by pressing function key F1 in the monitoring menu. This window serves to select the test signals. Selection of the individual test signals is made with function key F3 and the adjust dial or the cursor keys. The test signal is switched on or off with function key F4. Pressing function key F5 (EXIT) closes the window and returns the user to main menu MONITORING.

Overview The meanings of the individual test signals are explained below.

Test signal Meaning OFF switched off Stair(case) staircase Saw(tooth)_100 sawtooth 0 -100% Colbar color bar Saw_14 Ramp 0 -14% M-Burst Multiburst 10% 10% video level, for monitor adjustment * 90% 90% video level, for monitor adjustment * 60%Are 60% video level (area) Black black FPNPos positive FPN correction signal FPN Rd last stored FPN correction data FPNNeg negative FPN correction signal FPNIM Intermediate FPN correction signal FPN Rd last stored FPN correction data FPNPT Primetime FPN correction signal

4-112 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.11 Monitoring Menu FCP

* To achieve this video levels, set following parameters: Select CRT gamma with the function key F2 to “ON” (Section 4.6.1 Grading Setup) Select Film type with the function key F1 to “Print pos”. (Section 4.4 Film menu) Select Color correction with the function key F10 to “unity” (Section 4.6.1 Grading Setup)

Close window

F 5 EXIT Closes the window ”Test Pattern Select”. Alternatively, press function key F12 ”window CLOSE”.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-113 4.11 Monitoring Menu FCP STE-B1

4.11.2 PRESET WFM

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 477: Monitoring-Menu with window ”Preset for WFM ...”

Window ”WFM preset” is selected by pressing function key F11 in the monitoring menu. This window serves to select the preset adjustments for the different oscilloscopes.

Pressing function key F10 stores the preset adjustments together with the preset adjustments on the oscilloscope. Operating sequence for WFM preset adjustments: 1. Select the WFM interfaces with F1–F4 2. Select preset adjustments with F6–F9 3. Set the additional adjustments on the local WFM, if necessary 4. Store the preset adjustments with F10 STORE Pressing function key F11 (EXIT) closes the window and returns the user to main menu MONITORING.

Function keys The following adjustments can be selected via function keys.

F 1 press to enable WFM-REMOTE- ...CTRL1–4 (WFM waveform monitor, oscilloscope/vectorscope) Selection of the WFM control 1–4 for the preset adjustments F6–F9. The WFM interfaces are located on the connection unit of rack 2 (Monitoring / Rem Ctrl 1–4).

F 5 Not assigned.

Note: The following function keys F6–F9 can be inactive dependent on the connected WFM type.

F 6 select setting for WFM-ctrl (1–4) PARAD(E) Fixed preset setting for sequential display of the channels on the oscilloscope.

4-114 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.11 Monitoring Menu FCP

F 7 + F 9 select setting for WFM-ctrl (1–4) SUP2H / SUP1H Fixed preset setting for superimposed display of the channels on the oscilloscope (2 channel lines or 1 channel line in sequence each).

F 8 select setting for WFM-ctrl (1–4) VECTO(R) Fixed preset setting for switching over the oscilloscope to vector display (only in YCRCB operation).

F 10 STORE Stores the WFM preset adjustments F6–F9.

F 11 EXIT Closes the window ”WFM preset”. Alternatively, press function key F12 ”window CLOSE”.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-115 4.11 Monitoring Menu FCP STE-B1

4.11.3 MONITORING SETUP

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 478: Monitoring menu with window ”Monitoring Setup”

Window ”Monitoring Setup” is selected by pressing function key F12 in the Monitor- ing menu. This window serves to select various monitoring basic settings. Selection of the individual setup adjustments is made with the adjust dial or the cursor keys. Depending on the selection, the softkey assignment in the opened window is changed. Depending on the assignment, the function keys F1 to F11 are used to change the switching status. Pressing function key F12 (EXIT) stores the new selection, closes the window and returns the user to main menu MONITORING.

Overview The meanings and the possible selections are explained below. Factory adjustments are bold printed.

4.11.3.1 Monitoring Setup ”sequence”

Defines the display sequence of the monitoring signals on the oscilloscope. Selection:

F 1 ”R G B” RGB (sequential or superimposed) display

F 2 ”G B R” GBR (sequential or superimposed) display

4-116 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.11 Monitoring Menu FCP

4.11.3.2 Monitoring Setup ”H-blanking”

Switches the horizontal blanking of the monitoring signals on or off. Selection:

F 1 ”OFF” horizontal blanking switched off

F 2 ”ON” horizontal blanking switched on

4.11.3.3 Monitoring Setup ”clamp local”

Switches the clamping of the following monitoring signals on or off. Connection unit Rack 2: MONITORING / ANALOG OUT CH 1-R, CH2-G, CH 3-B Selection:

F 1 ”OFF” clamping switched off

F 2 ”ON” clamping switched on

4.11.3.4 Monitoring Setup ”clamp remote”

Switches the clamping of the following monitoring signals on or off. Connection unit Rack 2: MONITORING / REM ANALOG OUT CH 1-R, CH2-G, CH 3-B Selection:

F 1 ”OFF” clamping switched off

F 2 ”ON” clamping switched on

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-117 4.11 Monitoring Menu FCP STE-B1

4.11.3.5 Monitoring Setup ”RemCtrl 1–2”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 479: Monitoring submenu “Monitoring Setup”

Defines the connected WFM type (for REM CTRL 1–2 on connection unit rack 2). Monitoring Ch 1–R Selection: 300 / 300A / 5464 / 1730 / 1735

Remote F 1 ”300” Control 1 J 10 Ch 2–G Tektronix WFM 300 / 1740 / 1750 / 1760 connected *

J 11 Ch 3–B F 2 ”300A” Tektronix WFM 300 A connected J 12 J 3 S F 3 ”5464” Remote Control 2 J 13 Philips PT 5464 connected F 4 ”1730” Tektronix 1730 HD connected J 4 F 5 ”1735” Tektronix 1735 HD connected F 6 “5664” Philips PT 5664 connected **

Fig. 480: Connection unit rack 2 (only monitoring part)

Important Notes! * WFM TEK 1740 - 1760 Waveform monitor series TEK 1740 - 1760 has to be configured as WFM 300. Storing the presets via menu MONITORING F 11 preset WFM “Preset for WFM 300” F 10 STORE is not supported. Use front control panel for storing presets. Create a special control cable for WFM series TEK 1740 - 1760 as follows:

15-pin subminiature 25-pin subminiature Function D-connector, male D-connector, male connected to connected to Shadow Rack 2 TEK 1740 - 1760 pin 9 pin 14 GND pin 5 pin 18 Recall 2 Superimposed pin 6 pin 19 Recall 3 Vector pin 7 pin 17 Recall 1 Parade ** WFM Philips 5664 Disconnect pin 1 from the control cable PM5664, otherwise the remote control functions are disturbed.

4-118 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.11 Monitoring Menu FCP

4.11.3.6 Monitoring Setup ”master on”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 481: Monitoring submenu “Monitoring Setup”

Defines which waveform monitor is the master WFM. The master WFM can be operated always from the user interface of the monitoring menu (function keys F4–F10). Selection:

F 1 ”CTRL1” waveform monitor on REM CTRL 1* is master

F 2 ”CTRL2” waveform monitor on REM CTRL 2* is master

* on connection unit of rack 2

Close window F 12 EXIT Closes window ”Monitoring Setup”.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-119 4.11 Monitoring Menu FCP STE-B1

4-120 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.12 User Menu FCP

4.12 USER MENU

Only active when Data Output Interface FY 4345 is available in Rack3!

1 2 3 4

transmitting

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 482: User-Menu (HIPPI data channel)

Main menu ”User” is selected by pressing menu selection key ”User” on the control panel. This main menu serves to set the parameters for data reproduction with the HIPPI data channel (High Performance Parallel Interface).

Overview

1 HIPPI status display with following possible messages: ”not connected” data channel not connected with external unit ”connected” data channel connected with external unit ”transmitting” data channel is transmitting ”idle” data channel is ready ”failure” failure occurred in the data channel

Display of the actual data rate in MByte/s. The actual data rate is calculated by the CSP (FY 6303.xx in Rack 3).

2 Numeric entry for the three displays over the function keys F4 to F6. The manual entry of values is done with the numeric keyboard of the functional control panel, take over is done by pressing the concerning function key.

3 Display of the film frame number.

4 Window of the actual setup adjustments of the data output.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-121 4.12 User Menu FCP STE-B1

Function keys

F 1 transfer START Starts the data transfer in the HIPPI data channel (operates only in transfer mode ”frame by frame”). Note: In this moment the Shadow Telecine must be in the locked play operation (not during run-up time). LED ”Servo” on the Functional Control Panel is lit.

F 2 transfer STOP Stops the data transfer in the HIPPI data channel (operates only in transfer mode ”frame by frame”). Note: In this moment the Shadow Telecine must also be in synchronal play operation (do not stop before).

F 3 termina(l) OPEN Opens a terminal window to check the data transfer. Each “!” represents one transferred film image.

F 4 route DST Destination routing Destination takes the number entered with the numeric keypad and inserts the information as logical destination into the HiPPI data stream. Range of destination: 0 ... 255 This information will only be used if the Shadow Telecine is used together with a HiPPI switch. Note: The switch has to be programmed with the installed physical destination addresses, in order to pass the data stream to the desired logical destination. (e.g. set destination logical address 1 to physical address 1)

A physical address can be the slot number or connector number of the HiPPI switch.

F 5 image size PIX Defines the horizontal image size of the data output in pixels per line. With upper display for the actual pixel number. The functions of the manual entry, take over and display of the pixel number for function key F5 are the same as for function key F4. Note: When pressing function keys F7 to F9 the two display fields over the function keys F5 and F6 show the fixed values for SDTV and HDTV image size in pixels and lines.

F 6 image size LINES Defines the vertical image size of the data output in lines per image. With upper display for the actual line number. The functions of the manual entry, take over and display of the lines number for function key F6 are the same as for function key F4.

4-122 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.12 User Menu FCP

Note: When pressing function keys F7 to F9 the two display fields over the function keys F5 and F6 show the fixed values for SDTV and HDTV image size in pixels and lines.

F 7 fixed dimensions SDTV 4 : 3 Defines the horizontal and vertical image size for SDTV 4:3 at the data output. Image size ratio: 720 pixels x 540 lines The pixel and line number is shown in the display fields over the function keys F5 and F6.

F 8 fixed dimensions SDTV 16 : 9 Defines the horizontal and vertical image size for SDTV 16:9 at the data output. Image size ratio: 720 pixels x 405 lines The pixel and line number is shown in the display fields over the function keys F5 and F6.

F 9 fixed dimensions HDTV 16 : 9 Defines the horizontal and vertical image size for HDTV 16:9 at the data output. Image size ratio: 1920 pixels x 1080 lines The pixel and line number is shown in the display fields over the function keys F5 and F6.

F 10 not connected

F 11 mode DATA Switches the Shadow Telecine to data mode. Data mode: SDTV and HDTV outputs are switched off. In the Setup menu ”Data Mode” is displayed. The actual video standard is invalid. Note: With DATA mode ”OFF” (F11) the setup menu ”Setup TV Standard” appears automatically for switching back again the ”Data Mode” to the wished TV standard.

F 12 SETUP Opens window, see section 4.12.1 Setup Data Output.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-123 4.12 User Menu FCP STE-B1

4.12.1 SETUP DATA OUTPUT

transmitting

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 483: Window ”Data Output Setup”

Window ”Data Output Setup” is opened by pressing key F12 ”SETUP” in main menu ”User”. This window serves to configure the data packing mode, the data conversion, the connecting mode, the image file format, the color sequence and the transfer mode. Selection of the individual parameters is made with digipot ”adjust dial” or the cursor keys of the functional control panel. Depending on the assignment, the function keys F1 to F8 are used to change and store the switching status. Pressing function key F9 (EXIT) closes window and returns the user to main window User.

Overview The meanings and the possible selections of the individual parameters are explained below. Factory adjustments are bold printed.

4-124 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.12 User Menu FCP

4.12.1.1 Data Output Setup ”packing mode”

Puts data words of diverse video components together to data sequences to trans- mit them with a certain data rate in the HIPPI data channel. Selection: 3x8+K, 3x10 bit, 4x16 bit, 3xY-only(10bit), 2xY-only(16bit), 3xK-only(10bit)

F 1 ”3 x 8+K” 3 component data words and a key data word with 8 bit resolution each are put together to a 32 bit data word (e.g.: R, G, B, K).

F 2 ”3x10 bit” 3 component data words with 10 bit resolution each are put together to a 32 bit data word (e.g.: R, G, B).

F 3 ”4 x 16 bit” 3 component data words and a key data word with 16 bit resolution each are put together to two 32 bit data words (e.g.: R, G, B, K).

F 4 ”3xY–only(10bit)” 3 luminance data words with 10 bit resolution each are put together to a 32 bit data word (e.g.: Y1, Y2, Y3).

F 5 ”2xY–only(16bit)” 2 luminance data words with 16 bit resolution each are put together to a 32 bit data word (e.g.: Y1, Y2).

F 6 ”3xK–only(10bit)” 3 key data words with 10 bit resolution each are put together to a 32 bit data word (e.g.: K1, K2, K3).

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-125 4.12 User Menu FCP STE-B1

4.12.1.2 Data Output Setup ”data conversion”

8 9 5 6 5 transmitting

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 484: User submenu “Data Output Setup” With these settings the image data can be mapped to level ranges witch are required by different applications. Selection: standard TVLEV / GRLEV / DXR / TV_PD / LOG Genesis DXR-G / TV-G /C-PD

F 1 ”TVLEV” Image data maintains the TV video levels: black level 64d (10 bit) white level 940d (10 bit) within a total range of 0 - 1023d (10 bit) Note! The CRT gamma is normally switched on - Menu Grading - Grading Setup - but may be switched off for pure linear video signals.

F 2 ”GRLEV” Image data is mapped to graphic video levels: black level 0d white level 1023d (10 bit) within a total range of 0 - 1023d (10 bit) Note: The CRT gamma is normally switched on - Menu Grading - Grading Setup - but may be switched off for pure linear video signals.

F 3 ”DXR” Printing density characteristic for CINEON DXR (Digital Extended Range) files - e. g. used for post production systems like Inferno / Fire (Discreet Logic) or Dom- ino (Quantel) - which captures the dynamic range of NEG films.

OCN Film material For an One-Light transfer of OCN (Original Color Negative) material, the following settings are recommended:

(STE-B1 Functional Control Panel CP1)

4-126 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.12 User Menu FCP

D Set film type to “color NEG” Menu Film - F12 Setup - F8 color NEG

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 485: Menu Film

D Set primary color correction to “unity “. (e.g. menu Grading) Attention! If “unity ALL” is used, the contour correction is also set to unity.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 486: Menu Grading

Set Black D Adjust the minimum density (frame bar) of the NEG film to 100%. Therefore set first the testpoint selector to testpoint FPN, Menu Monitoring - F2 / F3.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 487: Menu Monitoring

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-127 4.12 User Menu FCP STE-B1

Then select F7 - illumination ADJUST from the film menu.

90% 40%

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 488: Menu Film

Adjust illumination until the signal level on the waveform monitor does not exceed 100 %. Use the “digipot adjust dial” for adjustment. If the peak signal values differ very much, film mode “Intermediate NEG” may give a better match. D Set the testpoint selector to testpoint “Film Color Correction - matching gamma”. Menu Monitoring - F2 / F3.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 489: Menu Monitoring

D As a starting point, set “Matching black” controls in all three channels to 0.9 (90%) and matching white with “Matching Gain” controls to 0.4 (40%). Select menu Film - F4 to F6 and adjust with the “digipot adjust dial”, see figure 488.

4-128 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.12 User Menu FCP

Set White D Adjust peak white (maximum density) of the channel with the highest white level to 100% (just below clipping) with “Matching gain” controls. Select menu Film - F4 to F6 and adjust with the digipot adjust dial, see figure 488.

If the black level (Dmin) in the channel with the highest white level is clipped, then readjust “Matching Black” of this channel until it is unclipped and set “Matching Black” of the two other channels to the same control values.

Remark! The following “Matching Gain” control values can be taken as reference: ~0.4 (40%) for a film density of ~1.6 above Dmin (B-channel) ~0.3 (30%) for a film density of ~1.8 above Dmin (B-channel)

D Adjust Dmin (minimum density, e. g. frame bar) of the two channels with lower levels by means of the “Matching Gain” controls to the same black signal level of the channel with the highest peak white level. Select menu Film - F4 and F5 and adjust with the digipot adjust dial, see figure 488. This ensure that Dmin is neutral independent of slight differences in the film stock. At the Genesis scanner this is done by entering Dmin values for R, G and B. The film data represents now print densities with neutral blacks and different peak white values in R,G and B, which reflect the gamma differences of the film dyes. Note! a. In DXR mode, the CRT gamma (Menu Grading - F12 Grading Setup) is not selectable, because CRT gamma is replaced by the DXR transfer characteristic. b. Image monitoring requires a calibrated graphics display monitor.

PRINT Film material

The Kodak DXR technology is intended to represent the dynamic range of the original negative. Print material is normally color timed and has therefore lost its relation to the original negative. If scanning of this material compatible to DXR mode, please use “TV_PD” data conversion.

The “TV_PD” One-Light transfer adjustment in this case is: D Adjust peak white of the PRINT film to approx. 100% signal level with illumination. Therefore set first the testpoint selector to testpoint FPN, Menu Monitoring - F2 / F3. D Adjust reference black with “Matching black” R G B to 0.5 (50%). D Adjust reference white with “Matching gain” R G B to 0.5 (50%).

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-129 4.12 User Menu FCP STE-B1

F 4 ”TV_PD” Images, color graded on a TV monitor, are mapped to Printing Density characteristic for CINEON DXR files - e. g. used for post production systems like Inferno / Fire (Discreet Logic) or Domino (Quantel). Note: In mode “TV_PD”, the CRT gamma is not switchable, because CRT gamma is replaced by the TV_PD transfer characteristic. (Menu Grading - Grading Setup)

F 5 ”LOG” “LOG” characteristic for CINEON DXR files. As a starting point for subsequent color grading, the following settings are recommended for this mode:

D Set primary color correction to “unity”

Attention! If “unity ALL” is used, the contour correction is also set to unity.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 490: Menu Grading

D Adjust the minimum density Dmin (= film base density, e.g.: frame bar) of the NEG film to 100%.

Therefore set first the testpoint selector to testpoint FPN, Menu Monitoring - F2 / F3

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 491: Menu Monitoring

4-130 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.12 User Menu FCP

Then select F7 “illumination ADJUST” from the menu film

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 492: Menu Film

Adjust illumination until the signal level on the wave form monitor does not exceed 100 %. Use the CP1 “digipot adjust dial” for adjustment.

Therefore set now the testpoint selector to testpoint “match gamma”, Menu Monitoring - F2 / F3.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 493: Menu Monitoring

D Adjust reference black with “Matching black” R G B on the waveform monitor to 2% signal level. Select menu Film - F1 to F3 and adjust with the digipot adjust dial, figure 492. D Adjust reference white with “Matching gain” R G B on the waveform monitor to 40% signal level. Select menu Film - F4 to F6 and adjust with the digipot adjust dial, figure 492. Note! a. In LOG mode, the CRT gamma (Menu Grading - F12 Grading Setup) is not selectable, because CRT gamma is replaced by the LOG transfer characteristic. b. For improved dynamic range in black, the usage of DXR or TV_PD data conversion is recommended.

F 6 ”DXR-G” Printing density characteristic for CINEON DXR files, which captures the dynamic range of NEG films. In addition to the DXR mode, the DXR-G mode provides a closer color matching to the Kodak Genesis scanner.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-131 4.12 User Menu FCP STE-B1

OCN Film material For an One-Light transfer of OCN (Original Color Negative) film material, the following settings are recommended:

(STE-B1 Functional Control Panel CP1) D Set film type to “color NEG”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 494: Menu Film

D Set primary color correction to “unity “. Attention! If “unity ALL” is used, the contour correction is also set to unity.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 495: Menu Grading

4-132 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.12 User Menu FCP

Set Black D Adjust the minimum density (Dmin = film base density, e.g. frame bar) of the NEG film to 100%. Therefore set first the testpoint selector to testpoint FPN, Menu Monitoring - F2 / F3.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 496: Menu Monitoring

Then select F7 - illumination ADJUST from the film menu.

90%

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 497: Menu Film

D Set the testpoint selector to testpoint “Film Color Correction - matching gamma”. Menu Monitoring - F2 / F3.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 498: Menu Monitoring

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-133 4.12 User Menu FCP STE-B1

D As a starting point, set “Matching black” controls in all three channels to 0.9 (90%) and matching white controls to 0.4 (40%). Select menu Film - F1 to F3 and adjust with the “digipot adjust dial”, see figure 497.

D Adjust Dmin (minimum density, e. g. frame bar) of the two channels with lower levels by means of the “Matching Gain” controls to the same black signal level of the channel with the highest peak white level. Select menu Film - F4 and F5 and adjust with the digipot adjust dial, see figure 497. This ensure that Dmin is neutral independent of slight differences in the film stock. At the Genesis scanner this is done by entering Dmin values for R, G and B. The film data represents now print densities with neutral blacks and different peak white values in R,G and B, which reflect the gamma differences of the film dyes. Note! a. In DXR-G mode, the CRT gamma (Menu Grading - F12 Grading Setup) is not selectable, because CRT gamma is replaced by the DXR-G transfer characteristic. b. Image monitoring requires a calibrated graphics display monitor.

4-134 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.12 User Menu FCP

PRINT Film material The Kodak DXR technology is intended to represent the dynamic range of the original negative. Print material is normally color timed and has therefore lost its relation to the original negative. For scanning of Print material compatible to DXR mode, please use “TV_G” data conversion.

The TV-G One-Light transfer adjustment in this case is: D Adjust peak white of the PRINT film to approx. 100% signal level with illumination. Therefore set first the testpoint selector to testpoint FPN, Menu Monitoring - F2 / F3. D Set reference black with “Matching black” R G B to 0.5 (50%). D Set reference white with “Matching gain” R G B to 0.5 (50%).

F 7 ”TV-G” Images, color graded on a TV monitor, are mapped to Printing Density characteristic for CINEON DXR files.

In addition to the TV_PD mode, the TV-G mode provides a closer color matching to the Kodak Genesis scanner. Note! In mode “TV-G”, the CRT gamma is not switchable, because CRT gamma is replaced by the TV-G transfer characteristic. (Menu Grading -Grading Setup)

F 8 ”C-PD” Cineon Print Density This logarithmic characteristic is close to the ideal Cineon print density characteristic. The density range is from 0 to 2.0. In addition to the TV_PD mode, the TV-G mode provides a closer color matching to the Kodak Genesis scanner. Note! In mode “C-PD”, the CRT gamma is not selectable, because CRT gamma is replaced by the C-PD transfer characteristic. (Menu Grading -Grading Setup)

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-135 4.12 User Menu FCP STE-B1

Matching in “C-PD” data conversion mode Optical matching of a scanned image must be done by using a waveform monitor connected to STE-B1. C-PD matching via SDTV or HDTV output is not possible.

The figure below shows a typical data transfer application with “C–PD” data conversion mode.

STE -B1 Waveform Monitor C-PD Characteristic Phantom Transfer Engine Graphic Display

B A A B WIND WIND HiPPI

Cineon Film Postproduction

Data Density

The following STE-B1 matching is recommended to use the C-PD data conversions mode.

D Connect a waveform monitor to the monitoring outputs of Shadow - Rack 2

Monitoring

CH1-R CH2-G CH3-B Rack 2 S

Remote Control 1 Subminiature D-Connector STE-B1 15-pin Connection Unit Rack 2

Waveform Monitor

4-136 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.12 User Menu FCP

D Set film type (xxx NEG) - Menu Film F12 film SETUP

Set Film Type

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 499: Menu Film

D Set primary color correction to “unity “. Attention! If “unity ALL” is used, the contour correction is also set to unity.

Set Unity

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 500: Menu Grading

Adjust D Adjust the light level for the lowest density (Dmin = film base Illumination density, e.g. frame bar) of the NEG film to 100% of the largest channel. Therefore set first the testpoint selector to testpoint FPN, Menu Monitoring - F2 / F3.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 501: Menu Monitoring

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-137 4.12 User Menu FCP STE-B1

D Then select F7 - illumination ADJUST from the film menu.

90%

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 502: Menu Film

D Adjust illumination until the signal level on the waveform monitor does not exceed 100 %. Use the “digipot adjust dial” for adjustment.

D Set the testpoint selector to testpoint “Film Color Correction - matching gamma”. Menu Monitoring - F2 / F3.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 503: Menu Monitoring

Set Black D Match the lowest neutral density (Dmin) of the used film or match with the appropriate Dmin (unexposed) film from the Te- lecine Tool Kit to the neutral dark level, using “matching black” controls (menu Film) for all three channels.

Set White D Match the highest neutral density of the used film to 100% (maximum 110%) signal level on the waveform monitor, using “matching gain” controls (menu Film).

“Matching black” and “matching gain” adjustments influence each other. Therefore repeat “matching black” and “matching white” adjustments until levels are consistent.

Note! A detailed application note for the usage of this new “C-PD” data conversions mode is in preparation and will be available as a supplement.

4-138 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.12 User Menu FCP

Application Settings Characteristic Workstation Requirements Comment Function Black White CRT DATA (10bit) (10bit) Grading on a TV ON TVLEV TV- 64d 940d no import or export LUTs ! transparent => black and Monitor Gamma display gamma = 1 (or fine white unclipped 0 TV => DATA => TV tuned)

ON GRLEV TV- 0d 1023d TV export LUT black and white clipped Gamma display gamma = 1 (or fine tuned) TV => DATA =>FILM ON TVLEV TV- 64d 940d import LUT to 0...1023 and Workstation clips black and Gamma >10 bit linear white display gamma to be applied ON GRLEV TV- 0d 1023d import LUT to >10 bit linear black and white clipped Gamma display gamma to be applied - TV_PD Print ~ 95d ~ 685d Cineon or Cineon import LUT Cineon Printing Densities Density for e.g. Inferno, Fire, Domino, - TV-G Genesis ~ 95d ~ 685d Cineon system Cineon Printing Densities PD for Genesis emulation

Grading on a cali- - DXR Print ~ 95d ~ 685d Cineon import LUT Cineon Printing Densities brated Graphics Density for e.g. Inferno, Fire, Domino; Display FILM=>DATA=>FILM One-Light OCN transfer with - illumination: signal level 100% - matching Black control / RGB = 0.9 (90%) * - matching Gain control / RGB = 0.4 (40%) * - primary color correction = UNITY - C-PD Cineon ~ 95d ~ 685d Cineon import LUT Cineon Printing Densities Print D. - illumination signal level 100% - matching Black & Gain by using a waveform monitor - DXR-G Genesis ~ 95d ~ 685d Cineon system Cineon Printing Densities for PD Genesis emulation One-Light OCN transfer with - illumination: signal level =100% - matching Black control / RGB = 0.9 (90%) * - matching Gain control RGB = 0.4 (40%) * -primary color correction = UNITY OFF LOG logarith- ~ 95d ~ 685d special display LUT or import Cineon mic LUT additional markers on the WFM for the black and white reference required DATA, 8...10 bit linear OFF GRLEV linear 0d 1023d display gamma to be applied black and white clipped Look-up tables (LUT) for data applications * = Reference values. For fine adjustment, see description above “data conversion DXR or DXR_G”

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-139 4.12 User Menu FCP STE-B1

4.12.1.3 Function of Look-up Tables for Data Applications / Data for TV

TV Monitor STE -B1 RGB TVLEV Characteristic

B A A B WIND WIND Phantom Transfer Engine TV Monitor

HiPPI

940**

64*

TV Monitor STE -B1 RGB GRLEV Characteristic

B A A B WIND WIND Phantom Transfer Engine TV Monitor

HiPPI

1023** 940**

0* 64*

** White reference level : decimal value of a 10 bit system * Black reference level : decimal value of a 10 bit system

Fig. 504: Data conversion

4-140 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.12 User Menu FCP

4.12.1.4 Function of Look-up Tables for Data Applications / Data for Film

TV–Monitor TV–Monitor STE -B1 STE -B1 RGB RGB TVLEV Characteristic GRLEV Characteristic

e.g.: Inferno, Domino ... e.g.: Inferno, Domino ... B A A B Phantom B A A B WIND WIND Phantom WIND Image Processor WIND Image Processor Transfer Engine Transfer Engine LUT Import HiPPI HiPPI LUT Import

940** 1023**

64* 0*

TV–Monitor TV–Monitor STE -B1 STE -B1 RGB RGB TV_PD Characteristic TV_G Characteristic Ch e.g.: Inferno, Domino ... Phantom Phantom B A A B Image Processor B A A B WIND WIND WIND Transfer Engine WIND Transfer Engine LUT Import HiPPI HiPPI

Cineon 685** 685** Film Postproduction

95* 95*

STE -B1 STE -B1 DXR_G Characteristic DXR Characteristic Phantom Transfer Engine Graphic Display Phantom e.g.: Inferno, Domino ... Transfer Engine Image Processor Graphic Display

B A A B B A A B WIND WIND HiPPI WIND WIND HiPPI LUT Import

Cineon Film Postproduction 685...859** 685...859**

76...95* 76...95*

Fig. 505: Dataconversion / * Black reference level : decimal value of a 10 bit system ** White reference level: decimalvalue of a 10 bit system

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-141 4.12 User Menu FCP STE-B1

4-142 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.12 User Menu FCP

4.12.1.5 Data Output Setup ”connection mode”

8 9 5 6 5 transmitting

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 506: User submenu “Data Output Setup”

Defines the HIPPI operation mode. Selection: STREA / DATAG F 1 ”stream” Stream operation: HIPPI data connection is established, images are transferred, connection is released only if errors occur or when the data mode is switched off. Note: that operation mode is not supported by all external HIPPI adapters.

F 2 ”datagram” Datagram operation: HIPPI data connection will be established for each image, image will be transferred, connection will be released again. Note: that operation mode is supported by most of the external HIPPI adapters.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-143 4.12 User Menu FCP STE-B1

4.12.1.6 Data Output Setup ”image file format”

8 9 5 6 5 transmitting

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 507: User submenu “Data Output Setup”

Defines the image file format. Each image is a separate file. Selection: DPX / TIFF F 1 ”DPX” DPX format * (Digital moving Picture exchange format)

F 2 ”TIFF” TIFF format *

Note! The Tag Image File Format (TIFF ) can only be used together with 3x8+K or 3x16+K packing mode. All other packing modes generated files are not according to the TIFF standard.

* Further details (restrictions and so on), see Planning and Installation, section In- terfaces.

4-144 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.12 User Menu FCP

4.12.1.7 Data Output Setup ”color sequence”

8 9 5 6 5 transmitting

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 508: User submenu “Data Output Setup”

Defines the sequence of the digital video components in the 32 bit HIPPI word. Selection: RGB / GBR F 1 ”RGB” sequence: R, G, B

F 2 ”GBR” sequence: G, B, R

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-145 4.12 User Menu FCP STE-B1

4.12.1.8 Data Output Setup ”transfer mode”

8 9 5 6 5 transmitting

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 509: User submenu “Data Output Setup”

Defines the transfer mode. Selection: OFF / FRAME / DISPL / CONTI F 1 ”OFF” No data transfer.

F 2 ”frame by frame” Only during PLAY the data transfer begins by pressing F1 transfer START and ends by pressing F2 transfer STOP. Scanned images are transferred proportionally to the film speed. Each frame is transferred only once. The transmission is interrupted by STOP, if the external receiver is not fast enough. This mode ensures that no image is miss- ing in the transferred sequence. Application: transferring and storing of complete sequences.

F 3 ”display changed” Data is transferred only if the film frame number or the image contents has changed. The transmission skips images, if the external receiver is not fast enough. Works in all operating modes (shuttle, step and so on). Application: preview purposes

F 4 ”continuous” Continuous data transfer, independent of the film run status (test mode).

Close window

F 9 EXIT Closes window ”Data Output Setup”.

4-146 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.13 Setup Menu FCP

4.13 SETUP MENU

1 2

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 510: Setup menu

This menu is selected by pressing the menu selection key ”SETUP” on the control panel. This menu serves to set basic machine parameters. D Global resetting of the setting values to standard values D Configuration of film deck, video, genlock, TV standard, control panel D Setting of date and time D Selecting the remote interface for the telecine

Overview

1 Display of current date and time

2 Display of TV standard. Shows the selected TV standard (or ”Data mode”).

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-147 4.13 Setup Menu FCP STE-B1

Function keys

F 1 unity GLOB Global resetting of the setting values in the Film-, Grading and Sizing menu to standard values.

F 2 Not assigned

F 3 Not connected

F 4 setup STDRD Opens window, see section 4.13.1 Setup TV standard.

F 5 setup FILMD Opens window, see section 4.13.2 Setup Filmdeck.

F 6 setup VIDEO Opens separate submenu, see section 4.13.3 Setup Video.

F 7 setup GENLK Opens separate submenu, see section 4.13.4 Setup Genlock.

F 8 Not assigned

F 9 setup PANEL Opens separate submenu, see section 4.13.5 Setup Panel.

F 10 set TIME Opens window, see section 4.13.6 Setup menu “Set Data and Time”.

F 11 set REMIF Opens window, see section 4.13.7 Setup remote.

F 12 Not assigned.

4-148 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.13 Setup Menu FCP

4.13.1 SETUP TV STANDARD

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 511: Window ”Setup TV Standard”

Setup window ”Setup TV Standard” is opened by pressing key F4 ”setup STDRD” in main menu ”SETUP”. This window serves to select the different TV standards. Depending on the assignment, the function keys F3, F5 and F7 are used to change the different standards. Data mode can be selected with F9. But is only available if the option FY 4345 Data Output Interface exists. Pressing function key F11 (EXIT) stores the new selection, closes the window and returns the user to main menu SETUP.

Function keys The following TV standards can be selected:

F 3 select SDTV 525_SDTV SDTV standard with 525 lines / 60 Hz 625_SDTV SDTV standard with 625 lines / 50 Hz 525_EDTV EDTV standard with 525 lines / 60 Hz 625_EDTV EDTV standard with 625 lines / 50 Hz 525_8:4:4 8:4:4 standard with 525 lines / 60 Hz 625_8:4:4 8:4:4 standard with 625 lines / 50 Hz

F 5 select HDTV 1250_50 HDTV standard with 1152 active lines / 50 Hz * 1125_60 HDTV standard with 1035 active lines / 60 Hz * 1125_59 HDTV standard with 1035 active lines / 59.94 Hz * 1080_60 HDTV standard with 1080 active lines / 60 Hz * 1080_59 HDTV standard with 1080 active lines / 59.94 Hz * 720_60 HDTV standard with 720 active lines / 60 Hz ** 720_59 HDTV standard with 720 active lines / 59.94 Hz **

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-149 4.13 Setup Menu FCP STE-B1

F 7 select DTV 1080_24 P DTV standard with 1080 active lines / 24 Hz ** 1080_25 P DTV standard with 1080 active lines / 25 Hz ** 1080_23.9 P DTV standard with 1080 active lines / 23.9 Hz ** 1080_24 SF DTV standard with 1080 active lines / 24 Hz ** 1080_50 I DTV standard with 1080 active lines / 50 Hz ** 1080_23.9 SF DTV standard with 1080 active lines / 23.9 Hz **

* = Option FH 4069 HDTV Output is required ** = Options FH 4069 HDTV Output and FH 4066 Digital TV Option 1280x720/60P are required

F 9 data mode 50Hz The Shadow is switched to “data mode” and sends out images via the Data Output Interface (HiPPI serial)

All sync outputs and the timecode are set to video mode 1250/50/2:1 D Timecode is generated in 50 Hz mode (25 frames/s) D Available fixed speeds are 6.25; 12.5, 18.66, 25, 50; D Genlock generator is switched to 1250/50 D SDTV Sync Out provides a 625/50 sync signal

F 10 data mode 59.9Hz Selects data mode 59.9Hz, if the option FY 4345 Data Output Interface is available.

The Shadow is switched to “data mode” and sends out images via the Data Output Interface (HiPPI serial)

All sync outputs and the timecode are set to video mode 1125/59.94/2:1 D Timecode is generated in 60 Hz mode (24 frames/s) D Available fixed speeds are 6; 12, 24, 30, 48; D Genlock generator is switched to 1125/60 D SDTV Sync Out provides a 525/59,94 sync signal

F 11 EXIT

4-150 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.13 Setup Menu FCP

Note!

In data mode operation The Shadow Telecine can be switched over to data mode operation with function key F11 ”mode DATA” in the user menu. The actual video standard (adjusted in – menu Setup / display Setup TV Stan- dard – with F3, F5 and F7) is invalid. The display 2 in the main menu setup shows ”Data Mode”, see fig. 510. Besides, the SDTV, HDTV and DTV outputs are switched off.

The TV mode can only switched back to the video standard here in the setup window.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-151 4.13 Setup Menu FCP STE-B1

4.13.2 SETUP FILMDECK

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 512: Setup submenu ”Filmdeck Settings”

Setup submenu ”Filmdeck Settings” is opened by pressing key F5 ”setup FILMD” in main menu ”SETUP”. This submenu serves to perform filmdeck basic adjustments. The individual parameters are selected with the adjust dial or the cursor control keys. Depending on the selection, the softkey assignment in the opened window is changed. Depending on the assignment, the function keys F1 to F9 are used to change the switching states. Pressing function key F12 (EXIT) stores the new selection, closes the window and returns the user to main menu SETUP.

Overview The meanings and the possible selections of the individual parameters are explained below. Factory adjustments are bold printed.

4.13.2.1 Filmdeck setting “core diameter left / right”

Adjustment of the used bobbin or film reel diameters (separately for the left and right reel spindle). Important for determining the correct film supply indication and for the function ”auto stop” (see chapter 4.13.2.2). Selection: F 1 to F 5 50MM / 75MM / 100MM / 127MM / 150MM (Thomson recommends to use no 50mm bobbins).

4-152 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.13 Setup Menu FCP

4.13.2.2 Filmdeck setting “auto stop”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 513: Setup submenu “Filmdeck Settings”

Determines automatic filmdeck stop shortly before film end. Attention: adjust always the correct ”core diameter” (see previous chapter)! Selection: F 1 ”NEVER” automatic filmdeck stop switched off

F 2 ”SHUTT” automatic filmdeck stop only in shuttle mode

F 3 ”SH+PL” automatic filmdeck stop in shuttle and play modes

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-153 4.13 Setup Menu FCP STE-B1

4.13.2.3 Filmdeck setting “perforation”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 514: Setup submenu “Filmdeck Settings”

For perf selection in dependence on the film to be played. The number of perforation holes per film frame determines the value to be set. Selection: F 1 to F 5 2PERF / 3PERF / 4PERF / 6PERF / 8PERF

Note concerning 6/8 perf mode! 6/8 perf mode requires the options FH 1639 Vistavision and FH 4067 Rotation.

900 Rotation The vertical position of the 8 perf image requires a 90o rotation of the scanned image for the correct reproduction at the video outputs.

Vistavision The selectable 6 / 8 perf standards are: & D Vistavision1 8 perf 35mm film standard Cinerama D Cinerama1 6 perf 35mm film standard

TV Standards 6/8 perf mode operates in SDTV, (H)DTV2 and Data3 mode. The images are H & V scanned in horizontal direction with approx. 1500 lines, the vertical resolution is Resolution based on1920 pixels.

Restrictions D Film speed restrictions The maximum film speed for 6/8 perf mode is 30 fps fixed speed or 31.000 fps in SAS. D ACA LGA The ACA Lens Gate Assembly is not supported in the 6/8 perf mode D ACA Emulation The ACA emulation is not supported in the 6/8 perf mode. D Markers Markers are not supported in 6/8-perf mode. D Framing Framing shifts the image horizontally.

4-154 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.13 Setup Menu FCP

D Resolution The (H)DTV resolution in horizontal direction is limited to approx. 1500 lines due to the 90o rotated image scanning.

D Editing Operation The ballistic of the servo system in the filmdeck is changed for 6/8 perf mode. That means editing operation with the default telecine controller parameter is not accurate. (Pre-roll, stop etc.) Please find out the new 6/8 perf setup parameter by testing the editing functions of your telecine controller in 6/8 perf mode. Use alternatively he “default setup” or the “6/8 perf setup” parameters depending of the 2-4 perf or 6/8 perf mode. (run-up time has been changed to approx. factor 2)

D Perforation selection locked Selecting of 2, 3, 4, 6 and 8 perf film scanning is only possible in STOP mode. Changing of perf selections - performed by the Functional Control Panel or telecine controllers - during PLAY, Shuttle, JOG etc. will be ignored.

1 Trademarks! All brands and product names are trademarks of their respective companies! 2 Requires Option DTV 3 Requires Option Phantom Transfer Engine TE 4101

4.13.2.4 Filmdeck setting ”auto rescan”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 515: Setup submenu “Filmdeck Settings”

Automatic read-in of the changed frame into the frame store. (after focus, illumination, 6 dB gain, film type changes etc.) Selection: F 1 ”OFF” ”auto rescan” switched off F 2 ”ON” ”auto rescan” switched on

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-155 4.13 Setup Menu FCP STE-B1

4.13.2.5 Filmdeck setting ”scan standard mode”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 516: Setup submenu “Filmdeck Settings”

The default value of this parameter is VAR. The value FIXED is used if the Shadow operates in combination with a color processor “Pandora MegaDef”. In this case it is necessary the numbers of scanned lines are constant in both (50 Hz / 60 Hz) video and data modes.

Selection: F 1 “VAR” Default setting for a Shadow without Pandora MegaDef.

F 2 “FIXED” Scan is done in a defined fixed format for Pandora MegaDef.

4-156 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.13 Setup Menu FCP

4.13.2.6 Filmdeck setting ”maximum shuttle speed 35mm”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 517: Setup submenu “Filmdeck Settings”

Determines the maximum shuttle speed for 35mm films. Selection: F 1 to F 9 2 to 10 times the normal speed

4.13.2.7 Filmdeck setting ”maximum shuttle speed 16mm”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 518: Setup submenu “Filmdeck Settings”

Determines the maximum shuttle speed for 16mm films. Selection: F 1 to F 9 2 to 25 times the normal speed

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-157 4.13 Setup Menu FCP STE-B1

4.13.2.8 Filmdeck setting ”SepMag coupling”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 519: Setup submenu “Filmdeck Settings”

Defines the sepmag coupling of external sepmag units (via connection SEPMAG OUT / Rack 2). Selection: F 1 ”2*BP” (BP: Bi-phase Pulses) Sepmag synch pulses: 2*BiPh-(48/50 Hz)

F 2 ”10*BP” Sepmag synch pulses: 10*BiPh-(240/250 Hz)

F 3 ”1*BP” Sepmag synch pulses: 1*BiPh-(24/25 Hz)

4.13.2.9 Filmdeck setting ”TCgen Out coupling”

Defines the time code coupling of external time code units (via connection TC GEN OUT / Rack 2). Selection: F 1 ”2*BP” (BP: Bi-phase Pulses) Time code synch pulses: 2*BiPh-(48/50 Hz)

F 2 ”10*BP” Time code synch pulses: 10*BiPh-(240/250 Hz)

F 3 ”1*BP” Time code synch pulses: 1*BiPh-(24/25 Hz)

4-158 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.13 Setup Menu FCP

4.13.2.10Filmdeck setting ”Editor Out coupling”

Defines the editor coupling of external editor units (via connection EDITOR OUT / Rack 2). Selection: F 1 ”2*BP” (BP: Bi-phase Pulses) Editor synch pulses: 2*BiPh-(48/50 Hz)

F 2 ”10*BP” Editor synch pulses: 10*BiPh-(240/250 Hz)

F 3 ”1*BP” Editor synch pulses: 1*BiPh-(24/25 Hz)

4.13.2.11 Filmdeck setting ”Lamp Shutdown delay”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 520: Setup submenu “Filmdeck Settings”

Lamp Shutdown switches off the lamp after a selectable time out.

Selection: F 1 ”OFF” Lamp shutdown is switched off.

F 2 to F 6 ”10 S - 120 S” The lamp will be switched of after the selected time if the film transport stands still. The lamp will be automatically switched on whenever a new film transport command will be executed. Also a STOP command will switch on the lamp. Each command will preset the timeout to the selected time. In stand-by mode the lamp will be switched off always.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-159 4.13 Setup Menu FCP STE-B1

Notes: D If the lamp is switched off the optical system cools down. After switching on the lamp it can take minutes to warm up the system to a stable characteristic (see chapter “Power-On” in the Manual ”Plan- ning and Installation”). D If the lamp is switch on because of a new film transport command, some frames will be scanned with a low light level. D The life time of the lamp will go down if it will be switched often.

Close window

F 12 EXIT Closes setup submenu ”Filmdeck Settings”.

4-160 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.13 Setup Menu FCP

4.13.3 SETUP VIDEO

Note! Menu only effective when HDTV option FH 4069 is available!

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 521: Setup submenu ”Setup Video”

Setup submenu ”Setup Video” is opened by pressing key F6 ”setup VIDEO” in main menu ”SETUP”. This submenu serves to perform video basic adjustments separately for SDTV and HDTV outputs. The possible selections for the SDTV and HDTV outputs are nearly the same. The individual parameters are selected with the adjust dial or the cursor control keys. Depending on the selection, the softkey assignment in the opened window is changed. Depending on the assignment, the function keys F1 to F5 are used to change the switching status. Pressing function key F12 (EXIT) closes the window and returns the user to main menu SETUP. Overview The meanings and the possible selections of the individual parameters are explained below. Factory adjustments are bold printed.

4.13.3.1 Setup Video ”H/V-blanking”

Switches the horizontal and vertical blanking off or on or to narrow blanking values. Selection: F 1 ”OFF” H and V blanking switched off

F 2 ”NORM” H and V blanking switched the standard norm

F 3 ”NARRO” H and V blanking switched to narrow blanking (has no effects in HDTV standards)

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-161 4.13 Setup Menu FCP STE-B1

4.13.3.2 Setup Video ”analog coding format”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 522: Setup submenu ”Setup Video”

Defines the mode of the analog SDTV or HDTV outputs. Selection: F 1 ”YCRCB” YCRCB operation

F 2 ”RGB” RGB operation

4-162 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.13 Setup Menu FCP

4.13.3.3 Setup Video ”Sync on RGB”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 523: Setup submenu ”Setup Video”

Switches the sync signal in the RGB signal on or off. Selection: F 1 ”OFF” Sync in RGB signal switched off

F 2 ”ON” Sync in RGB signal switched on

4.13.3.4 Setup Video ”limiter 102%”

Switches the 102% video limiter on or off. Selection: F 1 ”OFF” video limiter switched off

F 2 ”ON” video limiter switched on

4.13.3.5 Setup Video ”VITC” (for future use, not supported)

VITC: Vertical Interval Time Code Switches the timecode on or off. Selection: F 1 ”OFF” VITC switched off

F 2 ”ON” VITC switched on

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-163 4.13 Setup Menu FCP STE-B1

4.13.3.6 Setup Video ”key blanking”

Switches the key blanking on or off. Selection: F 1 ”OFF” Key blanking switched off

F 2 ”ON” Key blanking switched on

4.13.3.7 Setup Video ”digital coding format”

Switches the 4:2:2, 4:2:2:4, 4:4:4:4, GBR/KBR or the GRKB mode on. Selection: F 1 ”4:2:2” 4:2:2 mode switched on Link A: Y, CB, CR Link B: Y, CB, CR Luminance with halfband filtered chrominance according to CCIR 601/656

F 2 ”4:2:2:4” 4:2:2:4 mode switched on Link A: Y, CB, CR Link B: K, 0, 0 Link A: Luminance with halfband filtered chrominance according to CCIR 601/656 Link B: with Key, Chrominance off

F 3 ”4:4:4:4” 4:4:4:4 mode switched on Link A: Y, CB0, CR0 Link B: K, CB1, CR1 Link A: Luminance and even unfiltered chrominance Link B: Key and odd unfiltered chrominance

F 4 ”G/KBR” GBR/KBR mode switched on Link A: G, B0, R0 Link B: K, B1, R1 Link A: Green and even unfiltered blue and red Link B: Key and odd unfiltered blue and red

F 5 ”GRKB” GRKB mode switched on Link A: G0, G1, G2, G3, ... / R0, R1, R2, R3, ... Link B: K0, K1, K2, K3, ... / B0, B1, B2, B3, ... Link A: all green and than all red signals Link B: all Key and than all blue signals

4-164 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.13 Setup Menu FCP

4.13.3.8 Setup Video ”Sync on YCRCB”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 524: Setup submenu ”Setup Video”

(in HDTV Output only) Switches the sync signal in the YCRCB signal Selection: F 1 ”NONE” No sync signal in video

F 2 ”Y” Sync only inserted in Y signal

F 3 “STAND” 1250 sync only in Y signal 1080 sync in all channels: Y CR CB

F 4 “ALL” Sync in all channels: Y CR CB

4.13.3.9 Setup Video “Bi - level” sync

Selection: OFF / ON

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-165 4.13 Setup Menu FCP STE-B1

4.13.3.10Setup Video ”actual HOA Filter”

Selects the analog output filter for HDTV or future standards. Default filter equipment on board HDTV Output Analog FY 6314.xx: Filter bank 1: Eureka Filter bank 2: Full Bandwidth The equipped filters are displayed on the control panel F2 and F3.

Selection: F 1 ”AUTO” Selects the filter depending on the TV format at the analog HDTV outputs Format 1250 , 1125, 1080 Filter: Eureka other Formats Filter optional

F 2 “EUREKA” Eureka filter is selected in all analog HDTV modes

F 3 ”FULLBW” Filter is bypassed in all analog HDTV modes The selected filter is displayed on the control panel

4.13.3.11 Setup Video ”output Wordlength”

Switches the wordlength in the digital output signal from 8 to 10 bits. Selection: F 1 ”8 BIT” 8 bit wordlength switched on

F 2 ”10 BIT” 10 bit wordlength switched on

4.13.3.12Setup Video ”matrix 1080x720p”

R’G’B’ to Y’C’B C’R matrix coefficients for the HDTV standards 1280*720/60P and 1920*1080/60I can be switched-over between SMPTE 240M and SMPTE 274 / 296M Selection: F 1 ”274M” coefficients according to SMPTE 274 and 296M

F 2 “240M” coefficients according to SEMPTE 240M

Close window

F 12 EXIT Closes setup submenu ”Video Settings”.

4-166 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.13 Setup Menu FCP

4.13.4 SETUP GENLOCK

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 525: Setup submenu ”Genlock Settings”

Setup submenu ”Genlock Settings” is opened by pressing key F7 ”setup GENLK” in main menu ”SETUP”. This window serves to perform genlock basic adjustments. The individual parameters are selected with the adjust dial or the cursor control keys. Depending on the selection, the softkey assignment in the opened window is changed. Depending on the assignment, the function keys F1 to F9 are used to change and to store the switching status. Pressing function key F12 (EXIT) closes the window and returns the user to main menu SETUP. Overview The meanings and the possible selections of the individual parameters are explained below. Factory adjustments are bold printed.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-167 4.13 Setup Menu FCP STE-B1

4.13.4.1 Genlock setting ”Genlock ref-sync-select”

Switches over to different genlock reference sync signals. Selection: F 1 ”INT” telecine is synchronized internally (runs free)

F 2 ”EXT1” telecine is synchronized by sync signal SYNC 1 on terminal panel rack 3

F 3 ”EXT2” telecine is synchronized by sync signal SYNC 2

F 4 ”EXT3” telecine is synchronized by sync signal SYNC 3 on terminal panel rack 3

F 5 ”SERIA(L)” telecine is synchronized by sync signal SER REF on terminal panel rack 3

4.13.4.2 Genlock setting ”Genlock pixel_delay”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 526: Setup submenu ”Genlock Settings”

Changes the genlock delay to pixel increments. Selection: F 1 ”0” Delay: none

F 2 to F 8 ”1–7” Delay: 1 to 7 pixels

F 9 ”more” Delay: adjustable via the adjust dial or the numeric keypad of the control panel (max. delay: 1 line). Note: Switch off the ”more” operation when changing to other parameters.

4-168 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.13 Setup Menu FCP

4.13.4.3 Genlock setting ”Genlock subpixel_delay”

Changes the pixel delay to less than 1 pixel. Selection: F 1 ”0” Delay: none

F 2 to F 8 ”1–7” Delay: 1 to 7 pixel parts

F 9 ”more” Delay: adjustable via the adjust dial or the numeric keypad of the control panel (max. delay: 1 pixel, in 256 single steps)

Note: Switch off the ”more” operation when changing to other parameters.

4.13.4.4 Genlock setting ”Genlock line_delay”

Changes the genlock delay to line increments. Selection: F 1 ”0” Delay: none

F 2 to F 8 ”1–7” Delay: 1 to 7 lines

F 9 ”more” Delay: adjustable via the adjust dial or the numeric keypad of the control panel (max. delay: 1 frame)

Note: Switch off the ”more” operation when changing to other parameters.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-169 4.13 Setup Menu FCP STE-B1

4.13.4.5 Genlock setting ”enable rack2-rack3 delay”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 527: Setup submenu ”Genlock Settings”

Switches on or off rack2-rack3 delay Selection: F 1 ”OFF” Delay off

F 2 ”ON” Delay on; value depending from parameter “rack2-rack3 delay”

Note!

Parameter rack2-rack3 delay are used to match the genlock generator delay to the delay of a color corrector, operating between rack 2 and rack3 (e.g. Pogle MegaDef)

4.13.4.6 Genlock setting ”rack2-rack3 delay”

Changes the genlock delay from 0 to 7 ore more line increments. Selection: F 1 ”0” Delay: none

F 2 to F 8 ”1–7” Delay: 1 to 7 lines

F 9 ”more” Delay: adjustable via the adjust dial or the numeric keypad of the control panel (max. 15 lines or 14 lines with option 6SC)

4-170 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.13 Setup Menu FCP

Close window

F 12 EXIT Closes setup submenu ”Genlock Settings”.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-171 4.13 Setup Menu FCP STE-B1

4.13.5 SETUP PANEL

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 528: Setup submenu ”Control Panel Settings”

Submenu ”Control Panel Settings” is selected by pressing function key F9 ”setup PANEL” in main menu SETUP. This submenu serves to set the configuration for the control panel. The individual parameters are selected with the adjust dial or the cursor keys. The function keys F1 to F9 serve to change the values or the switching conditions, depending on assignment. If figures have to be entered, the standard values are shown in the softkey bar above the function keys. This facilitates a rapid setting. Of course, it is also possible to enter values within the limits using the numeric keyboard or the adjust dial. Pressing function key F12 (EXIT) closes the submenu and returns the user to main menu SETUP.

Overview The meanings of the individual parameters and the possible selections and ranges are described in the section below.

4.13.5.1 Control panel setting ”film supply”

Display of the film supply in the HOME menu in feet or minutes (see section 4.3 ”HOME menu on page 4-9, 5 ).

F 1 ”FEET” Film supply is indicated in feet.

F 2 ”TIME” Film supply is indicated in minutes.

4-172 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.13 Setup Menu FCP

4.13.5.2 Control panel setting ”screen saver”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 529: Setup submenu “Control Panel Settings”

F 1 to F 8 “OFF”, 1 to 7 MIN Switches off the MCP display after an adjustable time. After actuating any control element, the menu shown last appears on the display.

4.13.5.3 Control panel setting ”beep on user message”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 530: Setup submenu ”Control Panel Settings”

Signal tone when user messages are given

F 1 ”NO” No beep

F 2 ”YES” User messages are accompanied by a short beep.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-173 4.13 Setup Menu FCP STE-B1

4.13.5.4 Control panel setting ”beep on diagn message”

Signal tone when diagnostic messages are given

F 1 ”NO” No beep

F 2 ”YES” Diagnostic messages are accompanied by a short beep Note:

The long alarm which is given in case of serious diagnostic messages cannot be switched off.

4.13.5.5 Control panel setting ”keyclick”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 531: Setup submenu ”Control Panel Settings”

F 1 ”OFF” No acknowledgement of a key actuation

F 2 ”ON” Each key actuation is acknowledged with a click.

4.13.5.6 Control panel setting ”multi function dial memory”

F 1 ”OFF” No storage

F 2 “ON” In the Vario Motion and Shuttle modes, the last MFD position (film speed and film run direction) is stored when the mode is left. When the Vario Motion and Shuttle modes are selected again, this last setting is used.

4-174 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.13 Setup Menu FCP

4.13.5.7 Control panel setting ”press mf dial enabled”

F 1 “OFF” No change-over

F 2 “ON” Depending on selection of ”pressing mf dial switches jog <–> (details in the next paragraph) pressing the MFD changes over between Jogging and Vario Motion or Jogging and Shuttle.

4.13.5.8 Control panel setting ”pressing mf dial switches jog <–>”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 532: Setup submenu “Control Panel Settings”

(only effective if ”press mf dial enabled” is ”on” ) F 1 “VAR” Pressing the MFD changes over between the Jogging and Vario Motion modes.

F 2 “SHTL” Pressing the MFD changes over between the Jogging and Shuttle modes.

4.13.5.9 Control panel setting ”mf dial clutch”

F 1 “OFF” No latching, no locking

F 2 “ON” MFD latches slightly in Shuttle and Vario Motion modes at film speed = zero (central position) and is locked when the maximum speed in the same direction is selected (forward and reverse).

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-175 4.13 Setup Menu FCP STE-B1

4.13.5.10Control panel setting ”mf dial rubbing”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 533: Setup submenu “Control Panel Settings”

F 1 to F 9 1 to 7 and more Adjustment of a rotation resistance for slight retardation of the MFD in Shuttle and Vario Motion modes. The higher the selected value, the higher the retardation effect.

4.13.5.11 Control panel setting ”volatile softkeys provided after (x0.1s)”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 534: Setup submenu “Control Panel Settings”

F 2 to F 8 1 to 7 Only valid in this submenu (setup PANEL). When a parameter field in the submenu is selected with the adjust dial or the cursor keys, a certain time should pass before a softkey bar appears above the function keys. ”5” With this, it can for instance be determined that any selection being present for more than 0.5 seconds is definitive. Only then, the softkey bar should appear on the display as it might be irritating otherwise.

4-176 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.13 Setup Menu FCP

4.13.5.12Control panel setting ”extended softkey modes (toggle, switch)”

Relevant for tables and quasi-analog level adjustments.

F 1 ”NO” Two-hand control Selection of a parameter from among several parameters arranged one above the other is made by means of scroll bar or pressing the cursor keys (cursor up, cursor down). The selected parameter line is displayed inverse. After the function key is released, the corresponding field may not be changed (this helps to prevent accidental changes).

F 2 ”YES” Several selections enabled at the same time: a) Switch mode (single-hand control) Longer pressing (duration of key activation longer than entered for ”key toggles if pressed shorter than (x0.1s)” and subsequent release of a function key enables the selection. The softkey is shown inverse. The adjust dial or the cursor keys serve to move the scroll bar (inverse) to the desired parameter. The value is entered automatically. If the function key is pressed and released again, it is disabled (goes out). Now, turning the adjust dial or pressing a cursor key is without any effect. If after the last setting with the adjust dial or the cursor keys no setting is made for a period longer than entered for ”key auto hold time in switch mode (sec)”, the key will be disabled (goes out) automatically in order to avoid any accidental changes of values. b) Toggle mode (not applicable for setting of continuous values such as level adjustments) Short touch (duration for key activation shorter than entered for ”Key toggles if pressed shorter than (x0.1s) of the function key below will move the scroll bar down with each touch. c) Two-hand control As described under ”NO”

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-177 4.13 Setup Menu FCP STE-B1

4.13.5.13Control panel setting ”Key toggles if pressed shorter than (x 0.1s)”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 535: Setup submenu “Control Panel Settings”

F 1 to F 8 0 to 7 (only effective if ”extended key modes (toggle/switch)” has been enabled with YES”). This serves to enable selection of a parameter from a table (scroll bar). A short touch (duration of the touch shorter than entered here) of the function key below a table moves the scroll bar down with each touch. Pressing the key longer enables the selection with the adjust dial or the cursor keys (see description ”extended key modes (toggle/switch)”. Repeated pressing means disabling.

4.13.5.14Control panel setting ”Key auto hold time in switch mode (sec)”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 536: Setup submenu “Control Panel Settings”

F 1 to F 6 10 – 60 s (only effective if ”extended key modes (toggle/switch)” has been enabled with YES”).

4-178 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.13 Setup Menu FCP

Serves to determine the automatic disabling time after the last entry. If after the enabling of a setting no entry is made with the adjust dial or the cursor keys before this time has expired, the function is disabled automatically in order to avoid any accidental changes of the settings.

4.13.5.15Control panel setting ”Key holding if pressed longer than”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 537: Setup submenu “Control Panel Settings”

F 1 to F 7 1 to 7 s Avoids accidental change of a parameter selection or setting after releasing the function key. a) Pressing and holding the function key for a longer time (longer than entered here) results in enabling selection with the adjust dial or the cursor keys. Subsequent releasing of the function key disables the selection. b) Pressing and holding the function key and simultaneously turning the adjust dial or pressing a cursor key enables the selection. The scroll bar in the table or the level to be set will be changed directly. Subsequent releasing of the function key disables the selection.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-179 4.13 Setup Menu FCP STE-B1

4.13.5.16Control panel setting ”rotation adjust mode (linear / accelerated)”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 538: Setup submenu “Control Panel Settings”

F 1 ”LIN” Turning the adjust dial changes the adjusted values in linear 1:1 mode.

F 2 “ACC” The adjusted values change the faster the quicker the adjust dial is turned.

4.13.5.17Control panel setting ”iMCS message weighting for panel”

This parameter decides the weighting of the FCP messages which are sent via iMCS to the Shadow Tele Cine maintenance program SDCMAINT. Steps of messages weighting sent via iMCS F 1 “0” all messages

F 2 “1” information

F 3 “2” warnings

F 4 “3” light recoverable errors

F 5 “4” standard errors

F 6 “5” severe errors

F 7 “6” fatal errors

4-180 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.13 Setup Menu FCP

4.13.6 SET TIME

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 539: Setup menu with window ”Set Date and Time”

Window ”Set Date and Time” is opened by pressing key F10 ”set TIME” in main menu SETUP. The display shows the window above with the possibility to set date and time.

Overview

1 Field for presetting date and time

Function keys The following functions can be selected via function keys.

F 1 realtime CLEAR Clears entry.

F 2 realtime SET Sets the data for time and date preselected in field 1.

Set date Set the cursor in field 1 to the desired position of date and time. and time Enter the new values via the ten-key keypad.

Actuate SET key F6 to store the value set in field 1.

Close window

F 7 EXIT Closes window ”Set Date and Time”. Alternatively, press function key F12 ”window CLOSE”.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-181 4.13 Setup Menu FCP STE-B1

4.13.7 SET REMIF – SETUP REMOTE INTERFACE

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 540: Setup menu with window ”Setup Remote”

Submenu ”Setup Remote” is selected by pressing key F11 ”set REMIF” in main menu SETUP. This window serves to select the interfaces (for filmdeck, video, audio, sizing and monitoring) from which the Shadow is remote-controlled (connections, see manual Planning and Installation).

Overview

Function keys

F 1 Not assigned

F 2 Select remote I/F FILMD. For controlling the filmdeck, optionally via the own (local) control panel or an external control panel. Rem 1 to 2 are iMCS (RJ45) control connections. Rem 1 is provided for the Functional Control Panel and Rem 2 and 3 for external color corrections. Rem 4, 5 (J61, J60 connection unit Rack 2) are RS422 interfaces for connecting an editor or a filmdeck control panel. Rem 6 Para. (J65, connection unit Rack 2) is a parallel interface for connecting a control panel with reduced filmdeck functions.

F 3 Select remote I/F VIDEO The function is similar as for function key F2, but applies to control of the video amplifier, alternatively local or external via Rem 1 to Rem 3.

F 4 Select remote I/F AUDIO The function is similar as for function key F2, but applies to control of the audio amplifier, alternatively local or external via Rem 1 to Rem 3.

4-182 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.13 Setup Menu FCP

F 5 Select remote I/F SIZING The function is similar as for function key F2, but applies to control of the sizing, alternatively local or external via Rem 1 to Rem 3.

F 6 Select remote I/F MONIT The function is similar as for function key F2, but applies to control of the monitoring, alternatively local or external via Rem 1 to Rem 3.

F 7 EXIT Closes the window and returns the user to main menu SETUP

F 12 Window CLOSE Closes the window and returns the user to main menu SETUP

Example: connect filmdeck remote control to Rem 4

Application Filmdeck remote control wished on Rem 4. Setup Selects menu SETUP

F 11 [set REMIF] Selects submenu setup REMIF

F 2 [select remote I/F FILMD.] Selects remote interface FILMDECK and then adjust Rem 4.

F 7 [EXIT] Returns the user to main menu SETUP

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-183 4.13 Setup Menu FCP STE-B1

4-184 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.14 Diagnosis Menu FCP

4.14 DIAGNOSIS MENU

1 2 3 4 7 5 6

FCP–SW: ..... FCP–FW: .....

DIAGN error from ....

Panel info ...... 03 - Aug - 1998 14:51:50 SPC running again

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 541 Diagnosis menu

Main menu ”Diagn” is selected by pressing menu selection key ”Diagn” on the control panel. This menu serves to indicate error and system messages for diagnostics and maintenance of the Shadow Telecine. If this menu is selected, the hardkey control (control and display elements below the display and on the right side of the display) of the control panel are locked, ex- cept: – the ”Stop” key in the filmdeck control keypad (flashes) – the menu selection keys – and the function keys Pressing key F12 ”menu BACK” returns the user to the menu from which the diagnosis menu was selected.

Overview

1 Display of the Shadow Telecine serial number

2 Display ”satellite FCP” Information that the control panel (FCP: Functional Control Panel) is re- motely controlled via the remote control interface iMCS (”satellite”).

3 Status machine control units 1st Line: Units are started and available 2nd Line: Units are released and running

FDC: Film Deck Controller ASC: Analog Signal Control SPC: Spatial Processing Control

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-185 4.14 Diagnosis Menu FCP STE-B1

4 Additional box for machine error messages

5 Display of the actual date and time

6 FCP-SW: software characteristic of the Functional Control Panel FCP-FW: firmware characteristic of the Functional Control Panel (firmware: electronic circuits in software)

7 Diagnosis-messages

Function keys

F 1 restart PANEL Software restart of the control panel

F 2 restart TK Press F2 twice: software restart of the Shadow Telecine.

F 3 not assigned

F 4 test KEYB opens separate submenu, see section 4.14.1 Keyboard Test (performance test of the keys, key decoders, key lamps, LEDs as well as MFD and digipot)

F 5 test DISP opens separate submenu, see section 4.14.2 Display Test (performance test of the display electronics)

F 6 show STATU(S) opens window, see section 4.14.3 Status Display (status messages concerning SCB, film illumination, genlock, FPN, and Wetgate status)

F 7 Not assigned

F 8 configuration OPTIO opens window option control dialog, see section 4.14.4

F 9 configuration SW (software) opens window software configuration, see section 4.14.5

F 10 configuration BOARD opens window board configuration, see section 4.14.6

F 11 clear MESSA

F 12 menu BACK Pressing this key returns the user to the menu from which the diagnostic menu was selected.

4-186 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.14 Diagnosis Menu FCP

4.14.1 KEYBOARD TEST

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 542 Submenu ”Diagn. Keyb”

Submenu ”Diagn.Keyb” is selected by pressing function key F4 ”test KEYB” in main menu ”Diagn”. This menu enables checking the keys, key decoders, key lamps, LEDs as well as the MFD and the digipot. Test A correct functioning of the control elements is ensured when the display shows the corresponding symbol after having actuated the control elements. The display ”key bounce indicator” has to light up only once when actuating a bounce-free key. A flickering of the display indicates a bouncing of the keys and consequently a disturbance.

Function keys

F 1 to F 11 Not assigned

F 12 EXIT press twice to close the window

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-187 4.14 Diagnosis Menu FCP STE-B1

4.14.2 DISPLAY TEST

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 543 Submenu ”Display Test”

Submenu ”Display Test” is selected by pressing function key F5 ”test DISP” in the menu ”Diagn”. This menu enables checking the correct functioning of the EL display. Test A correct functioning of the EL display is ensured when the display shows the corresponding functions (gray values, test patterns, circles or frames) after having pressed a function key.

Function keys

F 1 show SEL opens the function key row F2 to F11 for selection of the test patterns.

F 2 pattern BLACK generates black area

F 3 WHITE generates white area

F 4 GREY generates grey area or checkerboard

F 5 to F 9 generate diverse line patterns

F 10 CIRCL generates circles

F 11 FRAME generates outer frame

F 12 EXIT Closes the window

4-188 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.14 Diagnosis Menu FCP

4.14.3 STATUS DISPLAY

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 544 Diagnosis menu with window ”Diagnostic Status”

Window ”Diagnostic Status” is opened by pressing key F6 ”show STATU” in main menu ”Diagn”. On the right side of the window, the operating time of the Shadow Telecine and all operating times (and life times) of the Shadow lamps are displayed. On the left side of the window, the current status of SCB, film illumination, genlock synchronizing, FPN and Wetgate is shown.

Possible status messages are: SCB status: not running SCB not in operation running SCB in operation starting SCB starts up startup error SCB initialization error during startup recognized Illumination status: level reached nominal illumination level reached level not reached nominal illumination level not reached level change illumination level changed Genlock status: sync check running sync check after changing the video standard or the sync source external sync ok external synchronization accepted no locking to external sync wrong external sync, no locking no external sync connected no external sync found internal sync ok internal sync generator works internal sync error internal sync generator defective (FY 1316, rack 3)

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-189 4.14 Diagnosis Menu FCP STE-B1

FPN status: on correct FPN data loaded off no FPN data loaded

Wetgate status: Wetgate not supported jet

Function keys

F 1 to F 7 Not assigned

F 8 reset operation time PROJ Resets the operation time of the projection lamp.

F 9 reset operation time CAP Resets the operation time of the capstan lamp.

F 10 reset operation time A16 Resets the operation time of the audio comopt 16mm lamp.

F 11 reset operation time A35 Resets the operation time of the audio comopt 35mm lamp.

F 12 EXIT Closes the window

4-190 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.14 Diagnosis Menu FCP

4.14.4 OPTION CONTROL DIALOG

Rotation Wetgate 8mm Scanning HDNR Megadef

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 545 Diagnosis menu with “Option Control Dialog”

Window ”Option Control Dialog” is opened by pressing key F8 ”configuration OP- TIO” in main menu ”Diagn”. This window displays the activated and available options of the telecine. Sending the appropriate option code from the “Thomson License Document” activates the desired features.

F 5 To installing an Shadow option please enter the option code and press F5 send. All options indicated with “ON“ are installed.

1. Take the License Document(s) (see 546) you got from Thomson Digital Video Systems and enter the license code string from the License Document into the edit field at the lower left side of the dialog. Use the numeric data entry keypad on the Func- tional Control Panel for input the license code. Press the button SHIFT and the numbers 4...9 to enter the characters A ..F. The license code string consists of 5 times 4 characters or numbers.

2. Then push the ”Send”-button. If the decoding of the license string was successful the menu shows the name of the new option. If a this option has a time limit, this limit will be shown in the column ‘Timeout’

An error message ” Invalid license code !” appears, if the Shadow Telecine cannot decode the license code string. Perhaps you made a typing error during entry or the license document belongs to another Shadow Telecine.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-191 4.14 Diagnosis Menu FCP STE-B1

Please verify, if the product type and the serial no. shown in the main menu Diagno- sis (541) corresponds to the entries in the License Document(s).

Fig. 546 Example License Document

Now you can enter another license code or leave the dialog with the ”EXIT”– F12 button.

4-192 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 4.14 Diagnosis Menu FCP

4.14.5 SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION OF THE CONTROLLERS

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 547 Diagnosis menu with window ”Software Configuration”

Window ”Software Configuration” is opened by pressing key F9 ”configuration SW” in main menu ”Diagn”. This window displays the current software versions of the following Shadow Tele- cine controllers: ASC Analog Signal Controller (in rack 1)

FDC Film Deck Controller (in rack 2)

SPC Spatial Processing Control (in rack 3)

FCP Functional Control Panel (in control panel)

Function keys

F 1 to F 11 Not assigned

F 12 EXIT Closes the window, returns to the diagnosis menu.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 4-193 4.14 Diagnosis Menu FCP STE-B1

4.14.6 HARD- AND SOFTWARE EQUIPMENT OF THE P.C. BOARDS

FY 4313/12

FY 4345/13

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 548 Diagnosis menu with window ”HW/SW equipment”

Window ”Shadow HW/SW equipment” is opened by pressing key F10 ”configuration BOARD” in main menu ”Diagn”. This window displays the current hard- and software equipments of the p.c. boards mounted in racks 1–3.

Function keys

F 1 to F 11 Not assigned

F 12 EXIT Closes the window, returns to the diagnosis menu.

4-194 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 5. Operation

5. OPERATION

Front doors opened: Film operation up to a fixed speed of maximum 50 frames per second is possible.

Front doors closed: All operation modes are possible.

Attention: Opening the front doors effects that a high shuttle speed is reduced to 2 times play speed!

Front doors locked: With a certain shuttle speed (>2 times play) closed front doors are locked additionally. The front doors are unlocked as soon as the shuttle speed is reached again.

Note: Should it happen, that due to a technical disturbance, the electronic door lock cannot be unlocked, it is possible to manually unlock the door lock, see section 3 Servicing, chapter 3.17 in the Service Manual.

5.1 REPRODUCTION (PLAY)

There are four reproduction modes – Play, Jogging, Vario Motion and Shuttle. The following sections will give an overview of their features and applications.

5.1.1 PLAY

Play mode for reproduction at normal speed. Reproduction in this mode is started by pressing key ”Play "” on the control panel.

5.1.2 JOGGING

Select Jogging mode if you want to view a scene in slow motion frame by frame. Reproduction in this mode is started by pressing key ”Jog” on the control panel. In this mode the trackball can be used as Jog speed control.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 5-1 5. Operation STE-B1

5.1.3 VARIO MOTION

Select Vario Motion mode if you want to play back a scene in slow motion. The film speed can be set with the trackball in the range of the SAS speed in forward and reverse direction. Vario Motion mode is started by pressing key ”Var” on the control panel.

5.1.4 SHUTTLE

Select Shuttle mode if you want to reach a distant film position within shortest time (also rewind). The film speed is set with the trackball in the range of +/–10 times the normal speed (with 35mm). Reproduction in this mode is started by pressing key ”Shtl”.

Note: The maximum film speed is reduced near the end of the film. In Shuttle mode, the video picture can serve for orientation purposes.

5-2 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 5. Operation

5.2 AUTOMATIC SWITCHING-OFF

The telecine includes three automatic switching-off functions. 1. Film end switching-off 2. Film break switching-off 3. Thermal switching-off

5.2.1 FILM END SWITCHING-OFF

In the Play or Play mode, the film is spooled out completely and the film drive is stopped automatically when the end of film is reached.

In the Shtl or Shtl mode, the film speed is reduced from maximum to normal speed and then stopped when the end of film is reached. Pressing the Shtl key once more spools the film out completely and the film drive is stopped automatically. The end-of-film function is enabled again by pressing the Stop key on the film deck panel.

5.2.2 FILM BREAK SWITCHING-OFF

In the Play , Play and Shtl or Shtl modes, the film drive is stopped immediately in case of a film break. After a short time, the light of the Stand by key on the Local Control Panel goes out and the Stop key lamp on the control panel flashes. The FPN correction is preserved, the last picture is not frozen.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 5-3 5. Operation STE-B1

5.2.3 THERMAL SWITCHING OFF

To avoid overheating problems caused by to high a temperature of outgoing cooling air, a thermal switch is installed into the Shadow Telecine. The mains voltage will be switched off by means of this sensor when the exhaust air exceeds a temperature of 55°C ± 4°C (131oF ± 39oF). Thomson guarantees Shadow operation at an ambient temperature of maximum 35°C (95oF). The temperature of the exhaust air is normally by 10°C (50oF) higher than the intake air. If the ambient temperature rises up to 40°C (104oF) and higher, damage to a running Shadow Telecine is possible. In such a case the machine is disconnected from the mains and further operation is only possible after the ambient temperature was reduced. The thermal switch is performed with a hold function and the mains voltage can only be switched on via a reset button of this switch (see figure below).

In case the Shadow Telecine cannot be re-powered: D Set the power switch in position ”off” D Open the rear doors D Check the power connection: – Mains voltages at the Mains Terminal Board FH 1031 – 3 (2) phase circuit breaker D Push the reset button of the internal thermal switch. D Close the rear doors D Switch on the machine

Thermal switch incl. housing Push here for reset the thermal switch Fig. 501: Thermal switch in Shadow cabinet

5-4 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 5. Operation

5.3 MANUAL EMERGENCY SWITCHING-OFF

In an emergency case, the telecine can be switched off immediately with the Power switch (on the right side of the Shadow cabinet) from all operation modes without any risk for the telecine or the film.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 5-5 5. Operation STE-B1

5-6 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 6. Maintenance

6. MAINTENANCE

Modern telecine units stand out for high life expectancy and low maintenance ex- penditure. Nevertheless, preventive maintenance will be the basis to ensure reli- ability in service and to preserve the value of the telecine. This document provides the instructions needed for fast and competent carrying- out of maintenance works.

6.1 BASIC ACCESSORIES

With the Shadow Telecine the basic accessories are provided, including special tools and parts for first commissioning and servicing of the telecine.

Following parts are included:

Pc. Designation Part No.: Remarks / Use 1 Adjusting Pin Philips 1 126 696 013 Audio Adjustment 1 Allen Key 1.5 mm 9 000 505 140 Filmdeck Assembling 1 Allen Key 2 mm 9 000 505 141 Filmdeck Assembling 1 Allen Key 2.5 mm 9 000 505 142 Filmdeck Assembling 1 Allen Key 3 mm 9 000 505 143 Filmdeck Assembling 1 Allen Key 4 mm 9 000 505 144 Filmdeck Assembling 1 Allen Key 5 mm 9 000 505 145 Filmdeck Assembling 1 Screw Driver 3mm 9 000 505 045 Filmdeck Assembling (hexagon) 1 Wrench 5,5 9 000 505 103 Roller Adjustment 1 Wrench Size 7 9 000 505 105 Cabinet Assembling 1 Wrench Size 8 9 000 505 106 Cabinet Assembling 1 Wrench Size 10 9 000 505 108 Cabinet Assembling 1 Wrench 13 9 000 505 114 Cabinet Assembling 1 Wrench 17x19 9 000 505 134 Leveling Feet Adjustment 1 Screw Driver Size 0 9 000 505 045 Audio & Deflection rollers adjust. 1 Screw Driver Size 1 9 000 505 043 Audio & Deflection rollers adjust. 1 Screw Driver Size 2 9 000 505 042 Audio & Deflection rollers adjust. 1 Screw Driver (fine) 9 000 505 036 Board adjustment 1 Screw Driver (1 x 5.5) 9 000 505 036 Board adjustment 1 Glove Cloths 5 001 910 280 Cleaning Optics, Capstan Roller 1 Brush flat form 5 001 916 051 Cleaning Fan Unit Dustaway 5 108 601 021 Pressed-air Cleaner 1 Polisher 5 001 910 366 Tool for cleaning the guides of integration cylinder 1 Scraper 1 118 500 059 Tool for cleaning the guides of integration cylinder 10 Capstan tacho lamp 3 116 300 021 Spare part

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 6-1 6. Maintenance STE-B1

6.2 MAINTENANCE AND AIDS MATERIALS

Materials and aids for maintenance can be bought from

Thomson Local National Sales Organizations or BTS Media Solutions GmbH D-64331 Weiterstadt Germany

under the following order numbers:

D Cleaning fluid for the capstan roller (isopropyl alcohol) 5 108 701 008 D Audio head demagnetization 220 V (degaussing coil) 3 121 216 011 D Audio head demagnetization 110 V (degaussing coil) 3 121 216 010 D Dustaway (compressed-air cleaning means) 5 108 601 021 D Cleaning cloths 5 001 310 280 D Filter Set 2 128 102 142

6-2 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 6. Maintenance

6.3 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

Thomson recommends the following cleaning and maintenance intervals:

prior to Cleaning and each every semi– every see maintenance intervals film thread- 4–8 weeks annually 3–5 years section ing Light gap and film-guid- 6.5.2 ing edges X 6.6.3 (optical block) Capstan roller X 6.5.3 Film drive mechanism X 6.5 PT rollers X 6.5.1 Film gate X 6.5.2 COMMAG audio head X 6.5.4 Reel holder X 6.5.5 Filters and lenses X 6.6.4 Infrared filter X 6.6.4 Heat absorbing filter X 6.6.4 Filters of the filter wheel X 6.6.5 Front area of light split- X 6.6.2 ter (telecine) COMOPT sound optics X 6.7, 6.8 Gate blast filter change X 6.10 Check gate blast X 6.10 compressor 6.9 Filter mats, blowers X 6.11 Backup battery X 6.12

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 6-3 6. Maintenance STE-B1

6.4 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Attention! Before performing maintenance and service works, switch off the Shadow Telecine and disconnect it from the mains by switching off the circuit breaker at the Power Terminal Unit!

Prior to starting cleaning works on the drive mechanism, optical block, capstan roller or audio scanner, make sure that no film is threaded. For cleaning, always wear gloves and use clean, lint-free cleaning cloths (order no. 5 001 310 280) and isopropyl alcohol (order no. 5 108 701 008).

If working is required close to the halogen projector lamp, do not start working before it has cooled down for 30 minutes - risk of getting burnt.

For cleaning the capstan roller use isopropyl alcohol only, never acetone!

Please read and follow also the Safety Instructions at the beginning of the customer’s manual.

6-4 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 6. Maintenance

6.5 CLEANING THE FILM DRIVE MECHANISM

All film-contacting parts – such as sprocket wheel, optical block, audio scanner, capstan roller, all deflection and PT rollers (see the figure below) – should regularly be cleaned from dirt and emulsion deposits. It is advisable to perform these cleaning works at the intervals indicated on the table of section 6.3

PT rollers Sprocket wheel Optical block Capstan roller Audio scanner

PT rollers

B A A B WIND WIND

Fig. 601: Film threading path without PT Rollers

D Switch off the Shadow Telecine. Remove the film from the film deck. D Remove the emulsion deposits from sprocket wheel and deflection rollers using isopropyl alcohol and a cleaning cloth.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 6-5 6. Maintenance STE-B1

6.5.1 CLEAN OR REPLACE THE PT ROLLERS

PT rollers (particle transfer rollers) are used in the filmdeck to clean the film during play on both sides of dirt, dust and lint.

1. For replacing or cleaning remove the PT rollers by withdrawing the snapcap of the holder.

Holder Set (2 pcs) 2 128 102 117 PTR Roller Set 4 pcs 3 149 900 882

Snap cap

Fig. 602:

2. Clean the PT rollers in cold water with a rate of 2 - 4 drops mild detergent per liter.

Caution! D Do not use dishwasher detergent! D Do not use hot water as it can cause PTR’s to become very sticky and cause excessive adhesion and potential damage to the film. D Do not use packaging or other tapes to clean a PTR after it has been washed! Packaging tape will transfer some of its adhesive to the PTR and cause excessive adhesion of the film to the PTR, resulting in damage to the film. Simply wash the PTR’s and allow them to dry thoroughly before reinstalla- tion. D If cleaned properly, PTRs should roll off one another when stuck together. Rollers that stick together without falling off must be rewashed in cold water with a mild detergent.

3. Dry the rollers and re-mount them. It makes no difference which way the rollers are placed on the hub end for end. Spare PT Roller Set (4 pcs) order no.: 3 149 900 882 Spare PTR Holder Set (2 pcs) order no.: 2 128 102 117

6-6 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 6. Maintenance

6.5.2 CLEAN THE FILM GATE

A dirty illumination prisma causes vertical dark stripes in the picture signal. Dirty film guiding can lead to dirt deposits in the integration film block and may cause scratches on the film. D For cleaning the illumination film block and the film guiding the film gate has to be removed. D Carefully clean the illumination slit, the film guiding and all film-contacting surfaces (use a cleaning cloth and isopropyl alcohol). Also clean the ceramic film positioner of the optical block see fig. 604. D How to use the polisher and the scraper: Clean the film guiding rails of the Integration Film Block if necessary with the polisher or scraper as shown in the figure below.

Attention: Protect the glass inlay. Use a cover of paper to protect the glass inlay when cleaning the film guiding rails with the polisher!

Film guiding rails Slit glass inlay

Polisher 5 001 910 366 Scraper 1 128 500 059

Integration Film Block (35 mm)

Do not use the red area!

Fig. 603: Cleaning the film gate

Attention! Never use the coarse (red) area of the polisher!

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 6-7 6. Maintenance STE-B1

Ceramic film positioner

Fig. 604: Lens Gate Assembly

6-8 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 6. Maintenance

6.5.3 CLEAN THE CAPSTAN ROLLER

Attention: Clean the capstan roller only in stop mode! Risk of hurt!

Audio scanner option

Capstan roller

Fig. 605: Capstan roller

A dirty capstan roller causes regularly occurring picture steadiness errors in the output picture.

D Remove the film from the film deck. D Clean the complete capstan roller surface thoroughly from all deposits with a isopropyl alcohol moistened cleaning cloth. Avoid to press the roller surface. As a cleaning agent, use only isopropyl alcohol and a lint-free cleaning cloth!

Attention: Removing the capstan or changing its position affects the picture steadiness, therefore any work on the capstan should be done by Thomson service personnel only.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 6-9 6. Maintenance STE-B1

6.5.4 CLEAN AND DEGAUSS THE COMMAG AUDIO HEAD (OPTION)

Attention: A polluted or magnetized COMMAG audio head impairs the audio quality.

Cover of the audio scanner (option)

COMMAG audio head

COMOPT scanning elements inside the capstan roller

Capstan roller

Fig. 606: Audio scanner

D Switch off the Shadow Telecine. Remove the film from the film deck. D Unscrew and pull off the cover of the audio scanner. D Clean COMMAG audio head Thoroughly clean the surface of the COMMAG audio head from deposits using isopropyl alcohol and a cleaning cloth. D Degauss COMMAG audio head Switch on the degaussing coil and make it touch the COMMAG audio head. Degaussing coil for 220 V order no. 3 121 216 011 Degaussing coil for 110 V order no. 3 121 216 010 D Then remove the degaussing coil but do not switch it off unless it is at least 30 cm away from the audio head. D Clean COMOPT scanning elements Remove dust from the COMOPT scanning elements of the capstan roller with a compressed air jet (Dustaway spray). D Fasten the cover of the audio scanner unit.

6-10 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 6. Maintenance

6.5.5 CLEAN THE REEL HOLDER, WINDING PLATE AND REEL LOCKING KNOB

The rubber surfaces of the Reel Holder, Winding Plate and Reel Locking Knob can become hard due to aging or can become grooved due to wear. The rubber surfaces have a lifetime of about 2 years. After this time the rubber surfaces must be exchanged for a new Reel Drive Exchange Set FD 0709, see also chapter 3 “Reel Drive Exchange” in the Service Manual. Insufficient grip between reel holder and winding plate (for films with bobbins) or film reel may cause slippage of the winding plate or the film reel. This can cause servo chatter. Warning! In the worst case, this may cause film damage.

Note: The rubber parts have to be regularly cleaned, depending on usage, every 4-8 weeks. Use only water for cleaning. Alcohol or spiritus will damage the rubber coating and accelerate aging.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 6-11 6. Maintenance STE-B1

6-12 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 6. Maintenance

6.6 CLEANING THE OPITICAL PARTS

The figure on the next page shows the light path in the Shadow Telecine and provides an overview on the required maintenance objects. Due to mechanical setup and accessibility it is advisable to perform the following service works in the order of the section numbers. Cleaning of the light path is always required when the available light output has de- creased perceptibly.

Attention: Switch off the Shadow telecine before cleaning the light path, and allow it to cool down for 30 minutes (risk of getting burnt in the proximity of the halogen projection lamp!).

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 6-13 6. Maintenance STE-B1

CCD sensor (G)

Beam splitter CCD sensor (B)

CCD sensor (R)

Sizing optics (inside optic block)

Film

Condenser lens 2 Heat absorbing filter Light slit Gray scale disk (inside condenser)

Light mains

Filter wheel (front view)

Infrared filter Condenser lens1 Halogen lamp

Filter wheel (back view)

Fig. 607: Light path

6-14 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 6. Maintenance

6.6.1 CLEAN THE OPTICAL BLOCK

D Remove the threaded film from the optical block, if necessary. D Turn the film gate locking lever of the optical block to the left. D Remove the optical block. D Clean the upper lense with an optical cleaning cloth.

Optic block Upper lens

Fig. 608: Optical block

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 6-15 6. Maintenance STE-B1

6.6.2 CLEAN THE FRONT AREA OF THE LIGHT SPLITTER

The front area of the light splitter is directly located over the optical block. D Remove the threaded film from the optical block, if necessary. D Remove the optical block D Clean the front area of the light splitter with a cleaning cloth. Avoid finger prints. D Insert the optical block.

Front area of the light splitter (directly over the optical block)

Fig. 609: Front area of the light splitter

6-16 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 6. Maintenance

6.6.3 CLEAN THE CODENSER LIGHT SLIT

D After removing the optic block, the light output slit from the condenser unit can be cleaned with a cleaning cloth. Avoid finger prints. D Insert the optical block.

Light slit

Fig. 610: Cleaning the condenser

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 6-17 6. Maintenance STE-B1

6.6.4 CLEAN FILTERS AND LENSES

D Open the read doors of the cabinet D Unscrew each filter element. D Clean the filters with a optical cleaning cloth (order no. 5 001 310 280). D Insert the filter elements, avoid finger prints.

Filter wheel

4 Filter elements fixed with screws

Projection lamp

Fig. 611: Lamp house with complete mounted filters

–– Fixing screws –– Heat absorbing filter

Condensor lens 2

Infrared filter

Condensor lens 1

Halogen lamp Slot coding

Fig. 612: Slot coding

6-18 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 6. Maintenance

D To clean the gray scale disk please remove first heat absorbing filter and condensor lens 2. Remove the gray scale disk by unscrewing the axle screw D Insert and fix the disk, avoid finger prints.

Gray scale disk with axle screw Heat absorbing filter

Condensor lens 2

Fig. 613: Cleaning the gray scale disk

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 6-19 6. Maintenance STE-B1

6.6.5 CLEAN THE FILTERS OF THE FILTER WHEEL

D Release the filter wheel by pushing down the motor. D Revolve the filter wheel that a filter stands upside. D Move the two fastening brackets of the filter to the side. D Clean the filter with a optical cleaning cloth and insert the respective filter. Avoid finger prints. D The fastening brackets have to lock in by turning.

Filter marking

PT / IMED filter

POS filter PT / IMED

Balance ring NEG POS

NEG filter

CAL SPARE

Balance ring

CAL filter

Push down for releasing the wheel!

Filter wheel motor

Fastening bracket Fastening bracket

Fig. 614: Insertion of the filter into the filter wheel

6-20 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 6. Maintenance

6.7 CLEAN THE COMOPT SOUND OPTICS (OPTION)

Fastening screw of the audio scanner cover

35mm COMOPT sound optics

16mm COMOPT sound optics

16mm COMMAG sound head

Fig. 615: Audio scanner

D Remove the fastening screw of the audio scanner cover and remove the cover. D Clean the dirty COMOPT sound optics (light entrance lens as well as light exit lens) with an air jet (Dustaway spray).

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 6-21 6. Maintenance STE-B1

6-22 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 6. Maintenance

6.8 CHANGE THE COMOPT SOUND LAMP

The audio scanner of the Shadow Telecine is equipped with one 6 V/20 W halogen COMOPT sound lamp each (order no. contained in Lamp and Key Button Set 2 128 102 141) for 16mm and 35mm COMOPT films.

The corresponding COMOPT sound lamp will be switched on automatically (depending on the optical block in use), when COMOPT is selected.

Plug of the COMOPT sound lamp

Locking angle

35mm COMOPT sound lamp 16mm COMOPT sound lamp

Centering pin 35mmCOMOPTsoundoptics

16mmCOMOPTsoundoptics

16mm COMOPT audio head

Fig. 616: Audio scanner (opened)

Change COMOPT 1. Remove the fastening screw of the audio scanner cover and pull off the cover. sound lamp: 2. Pull the plug of the COMOPT sound lamp out of its socket.

3. Turn both locking angles at the lamp holder to the side and pull the defective lamp out of the lamp holder (note mounting position).

4. Slide the new lamp all the way into the lamp holder (watch the centering pin, avoid finger prints), close both locking angles and refit the lamp plug.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 6-23 6. Maintenance STE-B1

When changing a COMOPT sound lamp, slight input level losses are possible in the respective audio channel. This slight level loss can be compensated (if necessary) as follows: Graphical Control Panel Preparation: 1. Thread a 16mm or 35mm comopt sound signal level film in the telecine.

16mm comopt signal level film, 400 Hz order no.: 0 000 993 498 35mm comopt signal level film, 1000 Hz order no.: 0 000 993 503

2. Press menu button ”Audio Levels” on the graphical control panel. The Audio Levels menu is displayed.

3. Press key ”SETUP”. Window ”Studio Level Setup” is opened.

4. Select button “Studio Level” and adjust -3 dBu.

Attention! Note actual adjustment for later readjustment. Press button Close to exit.

Fig. 617: Audio Level menu with window ”Audio Level Setup”

Select COMOPT 5. Press key ”Audio Config” on the control panel. sound operation: The Audio Config menu is displayed.

6. Touch “Source“ section Window ”SOURCE Channel 1/2” is opened.

6-24 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 6. Maintenance

Fig. 618: Audio Config menu

7. Press source channel 1/2 and select “Optical” mode for both channels.

Compensate 8. Touch “Pre-Adjust” section. audio level losses: Window ”Pre-Adjust” is opened.

9. Start play on the telecine.

Fig. 619: Audio Config menu with window ”Source Pre-Adjust”

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 6-25 6. Maintenance STE-B1

Activate 10. Press button “Manufacturing only” service mode: A numeric keypad menu is displayed.

Enter ”1996” on the numeric keypad of the control panel. The service mode is active now.

11. Select “Channel 1/2 Level“ Compensate the level loss of the COMOPT sound using the adjust dial on the control panel. With 35mm adjust to 0 dBu and with 16mm adjust to +4 dBu at the telecine output AUDIO 1/2 (terminal panel rack 1).

Subsequently press “Close” button to store the adjustments as unity values (default values).

Select section “Pre-Adjust again for the following equalizer adjustment.

Adjust 12. Thread a 16mm or 35mm comopt sound frequency response film in the tele- the equalizer: cine.

16mm comopt frequency response film order no.: SMPTE P16-MF 35mm comopt frequency response film order no.: SMPTE P35-MF

13. Start play on the telecine.

14. After selecting “Channel 1/2 Equalizer” adjust with the digipot control the frequency response to optimum at the telecine output AUDIO 1/2.

adjust with 16mm to " 2 dB and adjust with 35mm to " 1 dB

Subsequently press button “Close” to store the adjustments as unity values (default values).

15. Adjust to the original used studio level again. That means readjust the adjustment of item xxxx to the original value.

6-26 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 6. Maintenance

6.9 CLEAN THE AIR FILTERS

Check the air filters semi-annually for dirt deposits and where appropriate, clean or change them. Only clean filters ensure good cooling and optimum operation.

Air filters in the telecine cabinet: D Filters 1, 2 Front side, under rack 2 and rack 3 D Filters 3, 4 and 5 Rear side, bottom Spare filters are contained in the Battery and Filter Set (order no. 2 128 102 142)

6.9.1 FRONT SIDE FILTERS

D Open the lower front doors of the cabinet (rack 2 and rack 3) D Pull on the front side of the Shadow telecine at the gripping ledge of the air filter and remove it. The gripping ledge is located below the rack 2 and rack 3. The air filter consists of a filter mat which is fitted into a flat frame. D Remove the filter mat from the frame. Cautiously blow out the filter mat or wash it in warm water (approx. 40 °C), if required add a commercial soft agent. Clean the filter mat never with a sharp water jet or compressed air jet!

Filter mat

Fig. 620: Front side, filter mat rack 3

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 6-27 6. Maintenance STE-B1

6.9.2 REAR SIDE FILTERS

D Open the rear door of the telecine cabinet. D The air filters are located directly before rack 2 and rack 3 in the bottom frame of the telecine. D Remove the filter mat from the frame, blow out, wash or change it.

Filter mat

Fig. 621: Cleaning the filter mat

6-28 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 6. Maintenance

6.10 ADJUST COMPRESSED AIR OF THE GATEBLAST UNIT

Gateblast unit An integrated gateblast unit, consisting of a pressure reducer, 3 m air filter and magnetic valve, keeps the light gap and the integrations cylinder of the film gate dustfree. An external air compressor connected with a high pressure hose is additionally required. D Check your compressor regulary: – 2.5 ... 7.5 bar (35 ... 107 lb/sq.inch) – Pre-filtered air (max. 40 m particle size) – Dry air, less than 20% relative air humidity – Required air flow 60 l/min D Check the Shadow gateblast unit regulary: – Adjust the air pressure to 0.6 bar (8 lb/sq.inch) in Play mode – Change air filter regulary – Empty water collector regulary!

Pressure reducer

Air pressure: 0.6 bar (8 lb/sq. inch)

Air filter 3 m with water collector

Air filter is included in the Filter & Battery Set 2 128 102 142

Fig. 622: Gateblast unit of the Shadow Telecine The gateblast unit consists of the a magnetic valve, an air filter with water draining and a pressure reducer. When the telecine is switched off or when mains failure occurs, the magnetic valve of the gateblast unit switches off the air supply. D Switch the Shadow telecine to play and open the rear doors. D Adjust the air pressure at the gateblast unit to 0.6 bar (8 lb/sq.in.). Pull the knob of the pressure reducer, adjust the air pressure and press the knob again for locking.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 6-29 6. Maintenance STE-B1

6-30 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 6. Maintenance

6.11 CLEAN THE BLOWERS

For the Shadow telecine, cleaning of the ventilators is confined to the available fresh air and exhaust air blowers of the cabinet and monitoring cabinet.

The blowers of the internal devices do not require cleaning since they are constantly provided with filtered air and therefore have only slight dirt deposits.

Outgoing air: 900 m3/h (1200 cu. yd. / h)

Air Exhaust Option Outlet 2 x 250 mm

Fan Unit

Rack 1 Thermal Switch

Lamp Fan Fan Unit

Ventilation Shaft integrated in the doors

Rear Fan Unit

Rack 2 Rack 3

Fan Unit Fan Unit

Incoming air

Fig. 623: Blowers in the Shadow telecine cabinet

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 6-31 6. Maintenance STE-B1

Check the blowers for dirt deposits and where appropriate clean them semi-annually. Only clean blowers guarantee good cooling and optimum operation.

6.11.1 EXHAUST AIR BLOWERS

D For cleaning the blowers in the cabinet, loosen the 10 fastening screws of the blower cover on the cabinet top. D Remove the cover. D Clean the blower assembly with a suitable vacuum cleaner and a dust brush.

6.11.2 FRESH AIR BLOWERS

D Open the rear door of the cabinet. The blower unit for fresh air is located below rack 2 and rack 3. D Pull off the power plug, unscrew the earth connector. D For demounting the blower assembly, loosen the four fastening screws on the front and pull out the blower assembly. D Pull off and clean the air filter. D Clean the blowers with a suitable vacuum cleaner and a dust brush.

Remove blower assembly

Fig. 624: Removing the blower assembly

6-32 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 6. Maintenance

6.12 CHANGE THE BACKUP BATTERY

6.12.1 CHANGE THE BACKUP BATTERY IN THE TELECINE

According to the manufacturer, the lithium battery used on p.c. board FY 4105 in rack 1 (5th pcb. from left) has a life time of approx. 10 years. In order to ensure no loss of time/date settings in the off-state, Thomson recommends as a precaution to exchange the lithium battery after 5 years of operation. A spare battery can be ordered from the market under the type designation VARTA CR1/2 AA.

Exchange For exchange, switch off the telecine and pull out the plug-in card. The lithium battery is soldered on the p.c. board. Note the polarity of the battery when installing (danger of explosion)! The mounting position is marked accordingly on the p.c. board. When exchanging, the telecine loses the current time/date setting and returns after a battery change to a standard setting. For new time/date setting see section 4.13.6.

Caution!

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced (changed poles). Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions.

Protect the environment! Dead batteries do not belong in the garbage. Hand the used batteries over to a local disposal place!

6.12.2 CHANGE THE BACKUP BATTERY IN THE FUNCTIONAL CONTROL PANEL

The backup battery in the Functional Control Panel should be replaced by Thom- son service personnel only.

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 6-33 6. Maintenance STE-B1

6-34 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 7. Index

7. INDEX

4:3 / 16:9, –Select TV ratio, 3-12 B 6/8perf mode, 4-152 Backup battery, change, 6-33 Basic accessories, 6-1 A Basic adjustments of the telecine, 3-2 AES/EBU audio data format, 4-91 Blowers, clean, 6-31 Air compressor, 6-29 Air filter, 6-29 C Air filters, clean, 6-27 Capstan roller, clean, 6-9 Air pressure, 6-29 Cinerama 6 perf, 4-152 Audio –Audio channels, adjust, 3-45 Cleaning and maintenance intervals, 6-3 –Audio outputs to Studio inputs, adapt, 3-59 Color sequence –Audio sources, pre equalize, 3-47 –GBR, 4-143 –Audio sources, select, 3-45 –RGB, 4-143 –Channel delay, setup, 4-104 –Delay, 4-104 COMMAG audio head, clean and degauss, 6-10 –Digital audio channels, synchronize, 3-51 COMOPT sound lamp, change, 6-23 –Dolby noise reduction, adjust, 3-48 –Film audio paths, check, 3-56 COMOPT sound optics, clean, 6-22 –Headphone volume, adjust, 3-60 Condenser light slit, –Cleaning, 6-17 –Input source, setup, 4-94 Contour correction, 4-45 –Lip-synchronous film sound, adjust, 3-55 –Lowpass filter, select, 3-50 Control –Lowpass, setup, 4-98 –Basic menu control with FCP, 4-1 –Mono/stereo operation, select, 3-53 –Basic menu control with GCP, 4-1 –Mono/stereo output mode, select, 4-102 –Configurate control panel, 4-171 –Noise reduction, setup, 4-96 –Display test, 4-186 –Preemphase, select, 3-52 –Keyboard test, 4-185 –Preemphasis, setup, 4-101 –Menu control, 4-1 –Reference, select, 4-100 –Remote interfaces, setup, 4-181 –Sepmag coupling, 3-61 –Submenu, select, 4-4 –Studio level, adjust, 3-58 –Table selection, 4-4 –Test tone, select, 4-105 Control and display elements, 2-1 Audio config menu, 4-91 Control panels, 2-5 Audio data format, 4-91 –Configurate control panel GCP, 3-2 –Graphical control panel, 2-8 Audio level menu, 4-81 –Local control panel FH 4500, 2-5 Audio level setup, 4-85 Coring correction, 4-45 Automatic switch over, –from remote to Local Control Panel, 2-7 Automatic switching-off, 5-3 D –manually, for emergency, 5-5 –upon film break, 5-3 Damping roller, –Arresting the swing arm, 3-83 –upon film end, 5-3

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 7-1 7. Index STE-B1

Data applications, 4-139 Filmdeck setup, 4-150 Data connection mode Filmgate, –Change, 3-7 –Datagram operation, 4-141 Filters and lenses, –Cleaning, 6-18 –Stream operation, 4-141 Filters of the filter wheel, –Cleaning, 6-20 Data conversion mode – Genesis, 4-124 Fixed film formats, 4-37 – Standard, 4-124 Focus, adjust, 3-21 Data mode, 4-121 FPN, –Perform FPN correction, 3-13 Data output, 3-1 Frame line, adjust, 3-20 –Setup, 4-122 Front area of the light splitter, clean, 6-16 Diagnosis menu, 4-183 Function keys, 4-3 Display status, 4-187

E G Genlock setup, 4-166 Effect Filter, –Optical, 3-8 Grading, – Setup, 4-48 Effect filter, –Instert, 3-9 Grading menu, 4-45 EMV requirements, 3-85 Graphical Control Panel, 1-1, 4-1 –Menustructure, 4-2 F Graphical control panel, –Control and display elements, 4-1 Film –Analog signal basic gain, adjust, 3-35 –Black level, adjust, 3-39 H –Contour and coring, adjust, 3-43 –Film masking, adjust, 3-30 Hardware, –Board configuration, 4-192 –Film reels, mount, 3-17 Hardware conditions, 3-1 –Film type, define, 3-28 –Fixed film scanning format, select, 3-22, HIPPI data channel, 4-119 4-37 HIPPI-status-display, 4-119 –Fixed reproduction format, select, 3-24 –Gray level (gamma), adjust, 3-42 Home menu, 4-7 –Horizontal and vertical blanking, adjust, 3-26 –Intensity of film illumination, adjust, 3-33 –Matching to different color and monochrome I film types, 3-28 –Menu, 4-15 Image file format –Reproduction format, adjust variably, 3-25 –DPX format, 4-142 –Setup, 4-20 –TIFF format, 4-142 –Setup film, 3-11 –Setup film deck, 3-11 –Sizing format, adjust, 3-22 J –Speed, select, 3-12 –Thread film correctly, 3-15, 3-18 Jogging, 5-1 –User specific configuration of the telecine, 3-5 –White level (and black level), adjust, 3-37 K –White level, adjust, 3-41 –Winding direction, define, 3-15 Keycode readers, 3-63 –Winding plates, mount, 3-16 –Arresting the swing arm of the damping Film deck mechanism, clean, 6-5 roller, 3-83

7-2 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 STE-B1 7. Index

–Cabling, 3-84 –Window, open, 4-3 –Deflection roller adjustment, AATON reader, Monitoring 3-75 –Preset WFM, 4-112 –EMV requirements, 3-85 –Test pattern, select, 4-110 –Mounting, 3-66 –Mounting AATON reader, 3-68 Monitoring menu, 4-107 –Mounting ARRI reader, 3-66 Monitoring setup, 4-114 –Mounting dual keycode readers, 3-78 –ARRI and AATON, 3-79 Multi cue menu, 4-77 –ARRI and EVERTZ, 3-80 –Mounting EVERTZ reader, 3-69 –Mounting set, 3-65 O –Mounting single keycode reader on base plate, 3-70 Operation, 5-1 –AATON, 3-73 Operational preparations, 3-1 –ARRI, 3-72 –EVERTZ, 3-74 Optical block –Park and read position, 3-81 –Change, 3-5 –ARRI and EVERTZ, 3-82 –clean, 6-15 –Parking position, 3-76 Optical parts, –Cleaning, 6-13 –Parking position ARRI, 3-76 Options, –Control dialog, 4-189 –Parking positions, –AATON or EVERTZ, 3-77 –Safety instructions, 3-63 P L Packing mode, 4-123 Play, 5-1 License Code, 4-190 Power–up, 3-1 Light gap and film guiding edges of the optical Pressure reducer, 6-29 block, clean, 6-7 PT rollers, –Cleaning, 6-6 Locking knob, –Cleaning, 6-11 Look–up tables, 4-137 R M Reel holder, –Cleaning, 6-11 Reproduction (play), 5-1 Maintenance, 6-1 Menu –Audio config menu, 4-6, 4-91 S –Audio level, 4-81 –Audio level menu, 4-6 Safety instructions, 3-63, 6-4 –Diagnosis menu, 4-6, 4-183 –Film menu, 4-6, 4-15 Set date and time, 4-180 –Grading menu, 4-6, 4-45 Setup film, 3-11 –Home menu, 4-6, 4-7 Setup film deck, 3-11 –Main menu overview, 4-6 –Monitoring menu, 4-6, 4-107 Setup panel, 4-171 –Multicue menu, 4-6, 4-77 Shuttle, 5-2 –Setup menu, 4-6, 4-145 –Sizing menu, 4-6, 4-23 Sizing menu, 4-23 –Time code menu, 4-6, 4-65 Software configuration, 4-191 –User menu, 4-6, 4-119 Software state, 1-1 –Window, close, 4-4

Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002 7-3 7. Index STE-B1

T Video, –Setup, 4-160 Video Level, 3-34 Testsignal, – Video, 4-110 Vistavision 8perf, 4-152 Thermal switch, 6-31 Time code menu, 4-65 Transfer mode, 4-144 W TV, –TV standard, select, 3-3 Winding plate, –Cleaning, 6-11 TV standard, –Setup, 4-147 Window, 4-3

U Z User menu, 4-119 Zoom mode, 4-28 User specific configuration of the telecine, 3-5

V Vario motion, 5-2

7-4 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002